for: SHOPPES AT HANFIELD VILLAGE - jmc-gc Pages Bids/Plans... · 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 5 . October 15, 2015 Shoppes at Hanfield Village – Building 4 ... 07072010 SUGGS THOMAS

for:

SHOPPES AT HANFIELD VILLAGE – BUILDING 4WESLEY CHAPEL STOUTS ROAD AND OLD CHARLOTTE HIGHWAYINDIAN TRAIL, UNION COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINACONTRACT DOCUMENTS122-3130-00

OCTOBER 15, 2015APRIL 8, 2016

PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 01 01 - 1

SECTION 00 01 01 – PROJECT TITLE PAGE

PROJECT MANUALINCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS

FOR CONSTRUCTION OF

SHOPPES AT HANFIELD VILLAGE – BUILDING 4WESLEY CHAPEL STOUTS ROAD AND

OLD CHARLOTTE HIGHWAYINDIAN TRAIL, UNION COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

PREPARED BY:

LITTLE DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING, INC.5815 WESTPARK DRIVECHARLOTTE, NC 28217

704-525-6350

ARCHITECT’S JOB NUMBER122-3130-00

ISSUE DATEOCTOBER 15, 2015

END OF SECTION 00 01 01

APRIL 8, 2016

PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 01 01 - 2

October 15, 2015 Shoppes at Hanfield Village – Building 4 122-3130-00

PROJECT DIRECTORY 00 01 06 - 1

SECTION 00 01 06 – PROJECT DIRECTORY

OWNER: ARISTA DEVELOPMENT, LLC520 Providence HighwayNorwood, Massachusetts

ARCHITECT: LITTLE DIVERSFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING, INC.5815 Westpark DriveCharlotte, North Carolina 28217PHONE: 704-525-6350FAX: 704-561-8700ATTN: Jason Loucks

STRUCTURAL: LITTLE DIVERSFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING, INC.5815 Westpark DriveCharlotte, North Carolina 28217PHONE: 704-525-6350FAX: 704-561-8700ATTN: Dan Wray

PLUMBING,MECHANICAL AND ENGINEER: JORAND & SKALA ENGINEERS, INC.

4601 Charlotte Park Drive, Suite 100Charlotte, North Carolina 28217PHONE: 704-599-4377 x1201ATTN: Jeff Sams

FIRE PROTECTION: G + P ENGINEERING, INC.

P. O. Box 195725Winter Springs, Florida 32719-6725ATTN: Wayne Pacer and Fadi Ghumrawi

CIVILENGINEER: EAGLE ENGINEERING

2015-A Van Buren AvenueIndian Trail, North Carolina 28079PHONE: 704-882-0561ATTN: John Ross



PROJECT DIRECTORY 00 01 06 - 2


TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 1

SHOPPES AT HANFIELD VILLAGE – BUILDING 4 WESLEY CHAPEL STOUTS ROAD AND OLD CHARLOTTE HIGHWAY

INDIAN TRAIL, UNION COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PGS.

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Hard Cover Sheet 00 01 01 Project Title Page 1 00 01 06 Project Directory 1 00 01 10 Table of Contents 3 00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets 1 00 31 32 Geotechnical Data 1+REPORT 00 72 00 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 1 SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary 3 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 3 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 5 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 5 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 7 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 6 01 42 00 References 3 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 6 01 60 00 Product Requirements 4 01 73 00 Execution 9 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 8 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 6 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 7 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 5 FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS – NOT USED DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 19 DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 18 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry 6 04 73 00 Adhered Manufactured Masonry Veneer 6 DIVISION 05 METALS 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 8 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 5



DIVISION 05 METALS (CONTINUED) 05 31 00 Steel Decking 5 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 9 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 9 DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES – NOT USED DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 4 07 24 19 Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) 9 07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers 6 07 54 23 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 8 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 7 07 71 00 Roof Specialties 9 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 7 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 5 DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 10 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 5 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 8 08 71 00 Door Hardware 8 08 80 00 Glazing 8 DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 5 09 26 13 Acrylic Veneer Plastering 2 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 5 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 3 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 5 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 5 09 91 00 Paints 8 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Signage 3 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 3 DIVISION 11 THROUGH 19 – NOT USED FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP DIVISION 20 THROUGH 21 – NOT USED DIVISION 22 PLUMBING – REFER TO DRAWINGS DIVISION 23 HVAC – REFER TO DRAWINGS DIVISION 24 THROUGH 25 – NOT USED DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL – REFER TO DRAWINGS



DIVISION 27 THROUGH 29 – NOT USED SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP DIVISION 30 – NOT USED DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 31 31 16 Termite Control 4 DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 7 DIVISION 33 THROUGH 39 – NOT USED PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP DIVISION 40 THROUGH 49 – NOT USED END OF SECTION 00 01 10




LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15 - 1

SECTION 00 01 15 – LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

The following drawings are issued as a part of the Contract Documents and are incorporated into this Project Manual by reference:

DRAWING NUMBER TITLE

GENERAL

G001 COVERG002 LIFE SAFETY PLANG003 WALL TYPES

ARCHITECTURAL

A101 FLOOR PLAN AND ENLARGED RESTROOM PLANA102 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND ROOF PLANA201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND BUILDING SECTIONSA202 ENLARGED ELEVATION DETAILSA301 WALL SECTIONSA401 DETAILSA501 DOOR AND GLAZING TYPES

STRUCTURAL

S001 GENERAL NOTESS101 FOUNDATION PLANS201 GIRT AND ROOF PLANS301 DETAILSS401 BRACED FRAME ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS

PLUMBING

P001.4 PLUMBING NOTES, SCHEDULE AND DETAILSP101.4 PLUMBING FLOOR AND ROOF PLANS

MECHANICAL

M001.4 MECHANICAL NOTES AND SCHEDULES AND DETAILSM101.4 MECH FLOOR AND ROOF PLAN

ELECTRICAL

E001.4 NOTES AND LEGEND – ELEC/RISER ROOME002.4 SCHEDULES/ELECE003.4 SPECIFICATIONSE100.4 ELECTRICAL SITE PLANE101.4 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN



LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15 - 2


GEOTECHNICAL 00 31 32 - 1

SECTION 00 31 32 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. A subsurface investigation report has been included in this section for reference only.

B. This report was obtained by the Owner for use in design and is not a part of the Contract Documents. Test boring records are available for Contractor's information, but is not a warranty of subsurface conditions.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The Owner may retain a soils engineer to observe performance of the work under this Division of the specifications. No deviations from the Contract Documents shall be made without written approval of the Architect.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall visit the site and acquaint himself with all existing conditions. Prior to bidding, bidders may make their own subsurface investigation to satisfy themselves as to the site and subsurface conditions, but such subsurface investigations shall be performed only under time schedules and arrangements approved in advance by the Architect.


SUMMARY REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL

SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND

ENGINEERING EVALUATION

PROPOSED PUBLIX SITE

INDIAN TRAIL, NC

EEI PROJECT NUMBER 5086-G-NC

PREPARED FOR:

DOUG BENOIT, PE

ARISTA DEVELOPMENT LLC

520 PROVIDENCE HIGHWAY, SUITE 9

NORWOOD, MA 02062

SUBMITTED BY:

EAGLE ENGINEERING, INC.

2013A VAN BUREN AVE.

INDIAN TRAIL, NC 28079

SUBMITTED: MAY 14, 2014

PROPOSED PUBLIX SITE 5086-G-NC INDIAN TRAIL, NC MAY 13, 2014

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SCOPE ...................................................................................................................... 1

EXISTING CONDITIONS ..................................................................................... 1

TOPOGRAPHY ....................................................................................................... 2

AREA GEOLOGY ................................................................................................... 2

HYDROGEOLOGY ................................................................................................ 3

USDA SOIL SURVEY ............................................................................................. 3

EXPLORATIION PROCEDURE .......................................................................... 5

FINDINGS ................................................................................................................ 5

SITE PREPARATION ............................................................................................ 7

STRUCTURAL FILL .............................................................................................. 9

TYPICAL FOUNDATION DESIGNS ................................................................... 9

EXCAVATION ........................................................................................................ 9

SEISMIC SITE CLASS DEFINITIONS ............................................................. 10

PAVEMENT DESIGN .......................................................................................... 10

APPENDIX

Nomenclature and Symbols

Test Boring Logs

Test Boring Soil Profiles

Test Boring Location Plan


1

SCOPE

The primary objective of this investigation was to evaluate the existing subsurface conditions

within the area of the proposed development and to analyze these conditions as they relate to the

proposed construction and foundation design. In more detailed form, the scope off the subsurface

investigation included the following:

1. The determination of existing subsurface soil, rock, and groundwater conditions within the

depths sampled at the soil test boring locations.

2. The determination of areas where excavation difficulties should be anticipated, if any, at

the soil test boring locations.

3. Determination of soils that exhibit unsatisfactory soil bearing support capabilities and

recommended corrective actions to repair these soils.

4. Recommended foundation type and associated design information for building and floor

support.

5. Recommended asphalt pavement cross-sections.

6. Recommendations concerning construction procedures, quality control measures, and any

anticipated design and/or construction problems for the proposed development.

EXISTING CONDITIONS

The project area is an approximate 22.7-acre property east of the intersection of Old Charlotte Hwy

and Wesley Chapel-Stouts Rd., Indian Trail NC (“site” or “subject property”). The property is a

combination of several parcels and a subdivision of at least two larger parcels.

Parcel ID Name 07072011 HANEY THOMAS JACKSON JR ET AL 07072011 A GOODWIN DONALD WAYNE & KAY V DB 0283 PG 675 07072004 NIKOPOULOUS ANN DB 5508 PG 117 07072004A NIKSONS LLC DB 1486 PG 108 07072005 HELMS MARVIN GLENN & BETTY DB 0204 PG 231 07072006 HELMS MARVIN GLENN & BETTY DB 0168 PG 500 07072007 LIQUID MANAGEMENT LLC DB 3676 PG 808 07072008 LIQUID MANAGEMENT LLC DB 3676 PG 808 07072009 B-F UNION PROPERTIES LLP DB 4938 PG 344 07072010 SUGGS THOMAS ADAM & WF REBECCA L DB 1974 PG 299 07072017 BLACK DIAMOND HOMES LLC DB 5460 PG 021 07072018 BLACK DIAMOND HOMES LLC DB 5999 PG 589


2

The subject site is currently developed as residential/farmland with the majority of the property

plowed farm fields. Some isolated wooded area and an existing pond are located in the north/east

portion of the property. Regionally, the property is located approximately 2.5 miles southeast of

the central portion of downtown Indian Trail, NC. The subject property is located within a

previously developed commercial/residential area. Bordering the site to the south is Old Charlotte

Road, west Wesley Chapel Stouts Road, north/east farmland/residential and directly adjacent to

the southwest of the Sun Valley Corner Shopping Center/Family Fish House (closed business).

Old Charlotte Road provides a topographic ridge line allowing properties to the farther south to

drain away from the subject site. The intersection of Wesley Chapel Stouts Road and Old Charlotte

Highway is the high point of the general area, with the site sloping to the north northeast into

unnamed tributary of South Fork Crooked Creek and a change in elevation of approximately 20

feet.

TOPOGRAPHY

Based on an aerial photogrammetry by EEI, the topographic high of the subject property is located

towards the western portion of the property at 664 Feet above mean sea level (MSL). The

topographic low of the subject property is located in the eastern corner of the property around the

existing pond on site at 648 Feet MSL. The subject property slopes from west to east towards the

existing pond. The Boring Location Plan exhibits the current topographic information for the site.

AREA GEOLOGY

The project site is located in the piedmont physiographic province of North Carolina. The area is

characterized by broad, gently rolling interstream areas and steeper slopes along drainage ways.

Nor prominent hills stand out above the generally level uplands.


3

Rocks of the piedmont of the southeastern United States occur in belts that conform to the regional

northeastern trend of major structural features. These differences are commonly manifested in

topographic differences among the belts. The subdivision of the piedmont into belts is a useful

generalization when discussing large area, although exact boundaries may be impossible to draw.

The piedmont physiographic province is underlain by a complex of ingneous and metamorphic

rocks. Underlying bedrock of the piedmont physiographic province may be overlain by a mantle

of weathered rock. Locally, the site is underlain by metamorphosed mudstone and argillite.

HYDROGEOLOGY

Stormwater runoff at the subject property is via overland sheet flow toward the central portions of

the subject property which correspond to the South Fork Crooked Tributary. Wetlands and

floodplain features should be expected around these features. Offsite drainage areas will

contribute from the existing business area to the west of the site.

Shallow groundwater in the vicinity of the subject property varies and may be encountered

between approximately 3.5 to 15 feet below grade. The direction of the shallow groundwater is

likely to be influenced by the nearby surface bodies of water as well as the general surface

topography. Therefore, it can be assumed that the direction of groundwater flow at the subject

property is towards the east.

USDA SOIL SURVEY

According to the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) Web Soil Survey, the subject

property is underlain by three soil types:

Badin channery silty clay loam, 2 to 8 percent slopes, moderately eroded

Badin-Urban land complex, 2 to 8 percent slopes

Cid channery silt loam, 1 to 5 percent slopes


4

Badin and Cid soil types make up the general soil types of the area. These soils are generally silt

or silty clay loams extending to depths of approximately 35 to 55 inches below the ground.

Partially weathered rock is typically found underlying these soils. Engineering properties of these

soils, as classified by the Unified Soil Classification System, is typically ML, CL, or C (silts to

low plastic clay). Plasticity index for these soils range from NP (non-plastic) to 45.


5

EXPLORATION PROCEDURE

Thirty two soil test borings were advanced at the approximate depths shown on the attached Boring

Location Plan. The borings were distributed throughout the proposed development areas.

The soil test borings were made by mechanically twisting a continuous-flight steel auger into the

soil. Standard Penetration Tests were performed at designated intervals in the soil test borings in

accordance with ASTM D 1586 to provide a guide for estimating soil strength. In conjunction with

the penetration testing, split-spoon samples were recovered for visual classification. Water level

measurements were taken after the borings were drilled and then taken again after 24 hours. The

test boring records show detailed soil descriptions and stratifications, consistency evaluations,

standard penetration resistances (N), boring termination depths, and groundwater conditions at

each boring location.

FINDINGS

The general results of our soil borings indicated the presence of a layer of firm to very hard residual

soils underlain by partially weathered rock on the subject property. The residual layer extends to

depths ranging from 3.5 feet to 8.5 feet below the ground surface (bgs). Partially weathered rock

was encountered in all of the borings. An exception to that above was found in two borings (B-17

and B-28) where near surface existing fill soils were encountered. These fill soils should be

considered as not structural due to the weak strengths. Groundwater was encountered in three

borings (B-7, B-16, and B-17) at depths ranging from 3 feet bgs to 6.5 feet bgs. A more detailed

description of the subsurface conditions encountered at the borings is provided below and in the

Test Logs enclosed in the Appendix.

The following general soil strata are present at the test borings:

1. Fill soils were only encountered in two of the borings at depths starting at the surface and

extending to depths ranging from 3.5 to 6 feet bgs. These soils exhibited very soft to stiff

consistencies with N values ranging from 2 to 12 blows per foot (bpf) indicating none to

varying compactive effort was used in the placement of these materials. These soils are

considered non-structural due to the variable strengths and organic compounds.


6

2. Weathered in place residual soils of the piedmont physiographic province extend from the

ground surface to depths varying from 3.5 to 8.5 feet bgs. Residual soil is defined as the

product of bedrock weathered in-place in the bedrock original location. Texturally, these

soils are primarily sandy silts. Soil consistency (relative density in the case for sands), as

measured by the Standard Penetration Resistance (N), ranges from firm to very hard with

corresponding N-values ranging from 5 to 88 bpf.

3. Partially weathered rock was encountered in all of the borings. Partially weathered rock is

defined as a soil with a Standard Penetration Resistance (N) value greater than 100 bpf.

Partially weathered rock can occur at the interface between a weathered soil condition and

more competent bedrock. Partially weathered rock was found at depths ranging from 3.5

feet bgs to 8.5 feet bgs.

4. Auger refusal was encountered in all of the borings. Auger refusal can occur on competent

bedrock or boulders. Auger refusal material may prove to be difficult to excavate and

could require ripping or blasting efforts.

5. Groundwater was found in three borings. The groundwater levels ranged from 3.5 feet bgs

to 6.5 feet bgs. Groundwater levels tend to fluctuate 3 to 5 feet with seasonal moisture

variations and are generally highest in the late winter and early spring. During and after

wet periods, groundwater may be trapped near the ground surface and form an apparent

shallow water table.

PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION

The proposed development is planned as a commercial development with one anchor store and

several outparcel commercial stores similar to the existing development within the Sun Valley

Commons Area. We have assumed the buildings are to be constructed with brick veneer walls and

metal framed pre-engineering buildings. The proposed buildings are projected to have wall loads

from 2 to 3 kips per linear foot and column loads from 25 to 100 kips.

It is projected that the building floor slabs will be grade supported without a basement. Floor loads

are projected to be 50 to 150 psf.

Cuts and fills, as we understand it, will be minimal over the present site grades.


7

RECOMMENDATIONS

The recommendations presented in this report are best suited for the existing construction and

existing soil conditions. These recommendations are made as a guide for the structural engineer

based on our experience with similar soils under similar loading conditions. If conditions are

encountered during any subsequent construction, or the building types and/or locations should

differ from those presented in the report, Eagle Engineering, Inc. should be notified immediately

so that the conditions can be evaluated and recommendations can be modified as required.

Existing fill soils were encountered within borings B-17 and B-28, extending to depths from the

ground surface to 6 feet bgs. The presence of fill soils in two of the borings presents risks since

the soil conditions in and under the entire fill section cannot be determined without removing the

fill. If footings are placed on fill soils that contain voids, organics or soft zones not detected by

our borings, settlements and structural damage or failure will result. The subject fills were

probably constructed as part of some previous site development. The N-values observed in the fill

soil indicate no to varying amounts of compactive effort during these soil placement activities.

Based on our investigation, the fill or soft near surface residual soils encountered are not suitable

for adequately supporting the proposed construction. Eagle Engineering, Inc. recommends

undercutting and repairing these soils strata for shallow footing, concrete slab, and pavement

support. The undercut depths will vary from 3 feet bgs to 6 feet bgs.

The residual soils exhibit sufficient soil strength to properly support the assumed development

utilizing traditional shallow spread footings. If the site preparation and design recommendations

presented in this report are implemented, shallow spread footings can be supported on new

structural fill or existing residual soils.

SITE PREPARATION

In general, the site should be expected to contain a 4 to 6 inch layer topsoil underlain by the soils

described above. The following general recommendations are for overall site development

assuming a typical foundation support. These recommendations are made as a guide for the design

engineer based on our experience with similar soils under similar loading conditions.


8

Existing plans of the construction area should be reviewed and the site should be inspected to

locate existing underground utilities, such as electrical and telephone cables, which may serve the

existing adjacent structures. If such utilities are found in the proposed construction area, they

should be removed, relocated, or protected.

Any fill soil or debris encountered during the grading process should be undercut in accordance

with the above recommendations. The undercut surface should be inspected utilizing hand auger

borings and dynamic cone penetrometer testing. If the testing indicates sufficient strengths, begin

the backfill process as recommended.

The stripped and undercut surface should be proof rolled with a heavily loaded, pneumatic-tired

vehicle such as a rubber-tired roller, fully loaded dump truck, or pan. This vehicle should have a

minimum static weight of 20 tons and should be operated at a speed approximating that of a slow

walk (one to two miles per hour).

The proof roller should make at least four passes over the site with the last two passes

perpendicular to the first two. Any areas which wave or deflect excessively and continue to do so

after several passes of the proof roller should be undercut to firm soils and backfilled with new

structural fill (see Structural fill).

The working area should be protected so that surface runoff will drain away from the construction

locations by gravity. Preparation of the existing surface in this manner will minimized the

possibility of a reduction in the soil bearing capacity due to saturation from standing water.

For fill area, an approved fill material should be placed in thin, nearly horizontal lifts (lift thickness

depends on the type of compaction equipment, generally lifts of 8 inches loose measurements are

recommended). The lifts should be compacted mechanically with construction equipment such as

a vibratory sheepsfoot roller. The fill soils should be compacted as structural fill (see Structural

Fill).


9

An Eagle Engineering, Inc. engineering technician, working under engineering review, should be

on-site full time during undercutting operations to verify proper bearing capacity at each location.

Further, if the owner elects to backfill with crushed stone, the engineering technician should be

on-site to take adequate density tests throughout fill placement operations to verify that the

specified compaction is being achieved. It is particularly important that this be accomplished

during the initial stages of the filling operation so that adjustments in the compactive effort, number

of passes, or compaction equipment used can be made early in the fill program.

STRUCTURAL FILL

Structural fill, at ±2% of optimum moisture, should be compacted to at least 95% of the Standard

Proctor (ASTM D-698) maximum dry density and to 100% for the final 12 inches directly beneath

the pavement areas. This fill should extend 5 feet horizontally beyond the footing foundations and

paved areas and extend downward on a maximum 2 horizontal to 1 vertical slope. The structural

fill soil must be a non-organic soil with a minimum dry weight of 90 pcf with a USCS classification

of SC, SM, GC, GM, or ML. Plastic clay should not be used as structural fill.

TYPICAL FOUNDATION DESIGNS

If the site preparation is followed from above, we anticipate a system of shallow spread footing

foundations using a 2,500 psf design soil bearing pressure. This applies to foundations supported

at least 1 foot into stiff residual soil or new structural fill compacted to at least 95% of the Standard

Proctor (ASTM D-698) maximum dry density.

Minimum building code footing widths and 18-inch frost depths should be followed. Additional

steel reinforcement should be added to the footings and construction control joints should be

installed at least every 20 feet to handle any differential settlements.

EXCAVATION

Based on the above classification of the soils at the site, we do anticipate the excavations in excess

of 5 to 10 feet may encounter difficulties requiring ripping of partially weathered rock. Deeper

excavation below this level will likely require blasting.


10

SEISMIC SITE CLASS DEFINITIONS

Eagle Engineering, Inc. has assigned a seismic site classification of C according to the 2012

International Building Code, Section 1613. The average properties in the top 100 feet have been

calculated with an average standard penetration resistance, N≥50 blows per foot.

PAVEMENT DESIGN

If the site preparation and design recommendations presented in this report are implemented, the

proposed pavement can be supported on stiff residual soil or new structural fill.

The roads will be subject primarily to automobile traffic and occasionally by solid waste container

trucks. Pavement areas should be positively drained to maintain stable sub-grade soils.

The pavement sub-base, base course, an asphaltic materials should be inspected and tested during

preparation and placement to ensure that project specifications are being followed.


11

The pavement cross sections are provided based on an estimated California Bearing Ratio (CBR)

of 5 for saturated silt or clayey silt soils. Materials and methods of the pavement components

should conform to the North Carolina Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for

Roads and Structures.

Traffic Type Compacted Surface Course

Thickness

Compacted ABC Stone

Base Course Thickness

Automobile Parking 3” 6” Automobile Roads 3” 8” Trucks, 6000 Lbs. Wheel 3” 11” Trucks, 10,000 Lbs. Wheel 3” 13”

LIMITATION AND WARRANTIES

This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering

practice for your exclusive use. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made. Our

recommendations are based on the design information furnished to us, the data obtained in the

field-testing program, and our experience with soils in this geographic.

The recommendations given in this summary report are based on the assumption that the existing

subsurface conditions at this site do not vary substantially from those indicated by the Test Borings.

These recommendations are subject to review of the design plans and specifications at which time

we reserve the right to make revisions. In addition, these recommendations are based on competent

field engineering, inspection, and testing during construction.

This opinion letter may be relied upon you only in connection with and for the purposes set forth

herein and may not be uses or relied upon by any other person, firm, or entity for any purpose

whatsoever than in connection with regulatory requirements or in response to a court order without,

in each instance, the written consent of the signed. Eagle Engineering, Inc. is not responsible for

the independent conclusions, opinions, or recommendations made by others based on the field

exploration, sampling, and laboratory analyses presented in this report.


12

APPENDIX

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldRESIDUAL: Very Stiff Tan Red BrownGray Fine SANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Black SANDY SILT with RockFragmentsNo Recovered SampleAuger Refusal at 6'

17

100

100/0

BORING LOG PROJECT: Publix Site PROJECT NO.: 5086

BORING NO. B-3 CLIENT: Arista Development LLC DATE: 5/9/2014

LOCATION: Middle of Road at Northeast Side of Property ELEVATION: 655.74

DRILLER: EEI LOGGED BY: BS

DRILLING METHOD: HSA

File: 5086 Test Boring Logs Date Printed: 5/13/2014DEPTH TO - WATER> INITIAL: DRY AFTER 24 HOURS: CAVING>

ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E

PENETRATIONRESISTANCE

(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+


This information pertains only to this boring and should not be interpreted as being indicitive of the site.

PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: FARM FIELDRESIDUAL: Firm Gray Tan Orange FineSANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Gray SANDY SILT

No Recovered SampleAuger Refusal at 8.5'

8

100

100/6

100/0



LOCATION: North Corner of Building 8 ELEVATION: 655.28




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldRESIDUAL: Firm Brown Tan SANDY SILT

Orange Gray Black SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Dark Brown Tan SANDY SILT withRock FragmentsAuger Refusal at 6'5.75"

6

20

100



LOCATION: Centered Along Northeast Side of Property in the ELEVATION: 652.32




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldRESIDUAL: Firm Light Brown Black FineSANDY SILT with Rock Fragments

Very Hard Brown Tan Black Fine SANDYSILT with Rock Fragments

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Tan Gray SANDY SILT withRock FragmentsAuger Refusal at 10'

6

6

88

100



LOCATION: North Corner of Building 13 ELEVATION: 650.59




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

645

640

635

630

625

620

615

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Grass Roots and GravelRESIDUAL: Stiff Gray Blue GravelSANDY SILT

Firm Brown Tan SANDY SILT

Very Stiff Gray Tan Fine SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Black Gray SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

Auger Refusal at 12.5'

11

6

25

100/2



LOCATION: Northeast wall of Building 13 ELEVATION: 648



File: 5086 Test Boring Logs Date Printed: 5/13/2014DEPTH TO - WATER> INITIAL: DRY AFTER 24 HOURS: 4.0 CAVING>

ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Grass and RootsRESIDUAL: Stiff Red Tan Gray SANDYSILT with Rock Fragments

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Gray Brown Tan SANDY SILT withRock FragmentsNo Recovered SampleAuger Refusal at 6'

14

100/8

100/0



LOCATION: Northwest Side of Building 5 ELEVATION: 654.84




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Grass and Small RootsRESIDUAL: Stiff Orange Brown Tan FineSANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Gray SANDY SILT with RockFragments

Very Hard No Recovered SampleAuger Refusal at 8.5'

13

100

100/9

100/0



LOCATION: Southwest Side of Building 4 ELEVATION: 656.92




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Grass and RootsRESIDUAL: Stiff Brown Tan Orange FineSANDY SILT with Small Roots

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Gray SANDY SILT with RockFragmentsAuger Refusal at 5'6"

11

100/5



LOCATION: Northwest Sector of Site in Proposed Road ELEVATION: 659.99




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Weeds and RootsRESIDUAL: Firm Brown Tan Red FineSANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Gray Black Red SANDY SILTwith Rock Fragments


6

100

100/7

100/0



LOCATION: North Sector of Site in Proposed Road ELEVATION: 656.88




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldRESIDUAL: Very Stiff Red Orange YellowTan Fine SANDY SILT

Stiff Red Orange Gray Fine SANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Gray Brown SANDY SILT with RockFragmentsAuger Refusal at 6'4"

22

13

100/8



LOCATION: Southwest Corner of Building 13 ELEVATION: 653.78




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldRESIDUAL: Firm Brown Tan SANDY SILT

Hard Orange Tan Gray Brown SANDYSILT

Very Hard Tan Brown SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Light Brown Dark Brown BlackSANDY SILT with Rock FragmentsAuger Refusal at 10'

7

33

83

100



LOCATION: Northwest Corner of Building 13 ELEVATION: 651.27




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldsRESIDUAL: Firm Tan Orange FineSANDY SILT

Stiff Brown Tan Red Fine SANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Black Brown SANDY SILT with RockFragmentsNo Recovered SampleAuger Refusal at 8.5'

6

13

100

100/0



LOCATION: Northwest Side of Building 13 ELEVATION: 650.26




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

645

640

635

630

625

620

615

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldRESIDUAL: Brown Tan Gray Fine SANDYSILT

Firm Damp Brown Tan Gray Fine SANDYSILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Blue Black Brown SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

Auger Refusal at 10'

6

5

100/6

100/3



LOCATION: Southwest Side of Building 13 ELEVATION: 649.24



File: 5086 Test Boring Logs Date Printed: 5/13/2014DEPTH TO - WATER> INITIAL: 5.5 FT AFTER 24 HOURS: 3.0 FT CAVING>

ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

645

640

635

630

625

620

615

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Grass and Small RootsFILL: Stiff Brown Tan Fine SANDY SILTwith Small Roots

Very Soft Brown Tan Gray Fine SANDYSILT

RESIDUAL: Very Hard Brown SANDYSILT with Rock Fragments

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Black Red SANDY SILT withRock Fragments


12

2

85

100



LOCATION: Southeast of the Center of Building 13 ELEVATION: 649



File: 5086 Test Boring Logs Date Printed: 5/13/2014DEPTH TO - WATER> INITIAL: DRY AFTER 24 HOURS: 6.5 CAVING>

ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

645

640

635

630

625

620

615

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldRESIDUAL: Stiff Light Brown Tan OrangeFine SANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Tan Gray SANDY SILT withRock FragmentsAuger Refusal at 5.5'

9

100



LOCATION: South Corner of Building 13 ELEVATION: 649.78




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Weeds and RootsRESIDUAL: Firm Red Brown GraySANDY SILT with Small Rock Fragments

Hard Tan Gray SANDY SILT with SmallRock Fragments



6

46

100/8

100



LOCATION: West Corner of Building 3 ELEVATION: 656.83




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

660

655

650

645

640

635

630

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Grass and RootsRESIDUAL: Stiff Orange Tan BrownSANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Gray Tan SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

Very Hard No Recovered SampleAuger Refusal at 6.5'

9

100

100/0



LOCATION: Southeast Side of Building 2 ELEVATION: 660.20




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

RESIDUAL: Firm Reddish Brown GraySANDY SILT with Rock Fragments andSmall Roots

Hard Brown Tan Fine SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Gray Blue Black Fine SANDY SILTwith Rock Fragments

Very Hard Gray Blue SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

Auger Refusal at 11'6"

8

32

100

100/1



LOCATION: Northeast Side of Building 10 ELEVATION: 658.89




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: RootsRESIDUAL: Firm Brown Orange TanSANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Gray Tan SANDY SILT with RockFragments


8

100

100



LOCATION: East Corner of Building 12 ELEVATION: 658.10




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

RESIDUAL: Firm Orange Brown Tan FineSANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Black SANDY SILT with RockFragments

Very Hard Blue Gray Tan SANDY SILTwith Rock Fragments

Auger Refusal at 8'

7

100

100/1



LOCATION: Southeast Side of Building 11 ELEVATION: 654.49




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

RESIDUAL: Firm Orange Tan FineSANDY SILT



6

100

100



LOCATION: Parking Lot West of Building 13 ELEVATION: 651.87




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldRESIDUAL: Firm Red Orange FineSANDY SILT

Hard Brown Tan Gray SANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Tan Gray SANDY SILT withRock FragmentsNo Recovered SampleAuger Refusal at 8.5'

6

32

100

100/0



LOCATION: Parking Lot Southwest of Building 13 ELEVATION: 653.16




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

660

655

650

645

640

635

630

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

RESIDUAL: Stiff Orange Brown Tan FineSANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Gray SANDY SILT with RockFragmentsAuger Refusal at 5'11"

10

100/9



LOCATION: Southwest Parking lot of Building 1 ELEVATION: 660.34




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

660

655

650

645

640

635

630

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

FILL: Soft Orange Tan Fine SANDY SILT

RESIDUAL: Hard Brown Tan SANDYSILT with Rock Fragments


Very Hard Brown Tan Gray SANDY SILTwith Rock Fragments


4

33

100/3

100



LOCATION: Southeast Corner of Building 1 ELEVATION: 662.18




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

660

655

650

645

640

635

630

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

RESIDUAL: Stiff Brown Tan Gray FineSANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Tan SANDY SILT with RockFragments

Very Hard Brown Tan Gray SANDY SILTwith Rock Fragments

Auger Refusal at 8'

9

100/9

100/4



LOCATION: Southwest Side of Property on Proposed Road ELEVATION: 663.66




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

RESIDUAL: Firm Gray Tan Fine SANDYSILT

Hard Tan Gray Orange SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Black SANDY SILT with RockFragments

Very Hard Gray Blue Tan SANDY SILTwith Rock Fragments


8

39

100

100



LOCATION: Center of Site Along Proposed Road ELEVATION: 654.98




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

RESDIUAL: Stiff Brown Tan SANDY SILT

Firm Orange Brown Tan SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Gray Tan Brown SANDY SILT withRock FragmentsAuger Refusal at 8'4"

9

8

100/8



LOCATION: Northeast Side of Out Parcel 1 in Proposed Road ELEVATION: 657.33



File: 5086 Test Boring Logs Date Printed: 5/13/2014DEPTH TO - WATER> INITIAL: Dry AFTER 24 HOURS: CAVING>

ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

650

645

640

635

630

625

620

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Weeds and RootsRESIDUAL: Firm Light Brown Tan FineSANDY SILT with Rock Fragments

PARTIALL WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Gray Black Red SANDY SILTwith Rock Fragments


6

100

100/7

100/0



LOCATION: Proposed Road Northwest of Building 9 ELEVATION: 654.95




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldRESIDUAL: Stiff Brown Tan Gray FineSANDY SILT

Hard Brown Tan Gray SILTY SAND

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Gray Blue SANDY SILT with RockFragments


11

35

100/3

100/6



LOCATION: Center of Proposed Road Northeast of Proposed ELEVATION: 656.01




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

RESIDUAL: Firm Brown Tan Red FineSANDY SILT

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Brown Tan SANDY SILT with RockFragmentsAuger Refusal at 5'6"

8

100



LOCATION: Southeast Side of Out Parcel 1 ELEVATION: 659.83




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

655

650

645

640

635

630

625

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

TOPSOIL: Farm FieldRESIDUAL: Very Stiff Gray Tan SANDYSILT

Hard Gray Brown Tan SANDY SILT withRock Fragments

PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: VeryHard Gray Brown Tan SANDY SILT withRock Fragments


18

34

100

100



LOCATION: Proposed Intersection with Old Monroe Road ELEVATION: 659.82




ELE

VA

TIO

N(r

ela

tive)

DE

PT

H(f

eet)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

NA

T. M

OIS

T %

GR

OU

ND

WA

TE

R

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

PLA

ST

ICIT

Y IN

DE

X

% P

AS

SIN

G N

o. 200

N-V

ALU

E


(BLOWS PER FOOT)

N-VALUE

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100+



PAGE 1 of 1

B-9

B-10

B-10

B-9

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEV

ATI

ON

IN F

EET

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEVA

TION

IN FEET

-15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135

Plan View

Strata symbols

Topsoil

Silt

PARTIALLY WEATHERED

ROCK

EAGLE ENGINEERING, INC.GENERALIZED SOIL PROFILE

HORIZONTAL

DRAWN BY/APPROVED BY

DATE DRAWN

SCALE: 1"=(proportional)'VERTICAL 5/13/2014SCALE: 1"=5'

Publix Site

PROJECT NO. 5086FIGURE NUMBER

Soil Profile A

ARP/FLG

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 3

:40:

42 P

M

B-19

B-20

B-28

B-27

B-27

B-28

B-20

B-19

665

660

655

650

645

640

ELEV

ATI

ON

IN F

EET

665

660

655

650

645

640

ELEVA

TION

IN FEET

25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225

Plan View

Strata symbols

Silt

PARTIALLY WEATHERED

ROCK

Fill

Topsoil


HORIZONTAL


DATE DRAWN


Publix Site


Soil Profile B

ARP/FLG

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 3

:53:

46 P

M

B-12

B-11

B-9

B-9

B-11

B-12

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEV

ATI

ON

IN F

EET

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEVA

TION

IN FEET

100 200 300

Plan View

Strata symbols

Topsoil

Silt

PARTIALLY WEATHERED

ROCK


HORIZONTAL


DATE DRAWN


Publix Site


Soil Profile C

ARP/FLG

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 4

:01:

16 P

M

B-21

B-23

B-22

B-22

B-23

B-21

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEV

ATI

ON

IN F

EET

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEVA

TION

IN FEET

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Plan View

Strata symbols

Topsoil

Silt

PARTIALLY WEATHERED

ROCK


HORIZONTAL


DATE DRAWN


Publix Site


Soil Profile D

ARP/FLG

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 4

:16:

10 P

M

B-4

B-13

B-13

B-4

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEV

ATI

ON

IN F

EET

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEVA

TION

IN FEET

-20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

Plan View

Strata symbols

Topsoil

Silt

PARTIALLY WEATHERED

ROCK


HORIZONTAL


DATE DRAWN


Publix Site


Soil Profile E

ARP/FLG

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 4

:20:

17 P

M

B-5

B-3

B-3

B-5

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEV

ATI

ON

IN F

EET

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEVA

TION

IN FEET

0 100 200 300 400 500

Plan View

Strata symbols

Topsoil

Silt

PARTIALLY WEATHERED

ROCK


HORIZONTAL


DATE DRAWN


Publix Site


Soil Profile F

ARP/FLG

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 4

:23:

37 P

M

B-6

B-15

B-14

B-14

B-15 B-6

655

650

645

640

635

630

ELEV

ATI

ON

IN F

EET

655

650

645

640

635

630

ELEVA

TION

IN FEET

25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225

Plan View

Strata symbols

Topsoil

Silt

PARTIALLY WEATHERED

ROCK


HORIZONTAL


DATE DRAWN


Publix Site


Soil Profile G

ARP/FLG

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 4

:30:

22 P

M

B-7

B-17

B-16

B-16 B-17

B-7

650

645

640

635

630

625

ELEV

ATI

ON

IN F

EET

650

645

640

635

630

625

ELEVA

TION

IN FEET

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

Plan View

Strata symbols

Topsoil

Silt

Elastic silt

PARTIALLY WEATHERED

ROCK

Fill

Silty gravel EAGLE ENGINEERING, INC.GENERALIZED SOIL PROFILE

HORIZONTAL


DATE DRAWN


Publix Site


Soil Profile H

ARP/FLG

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 4

:36:

51 P

M

B-24

B-32

B-31

B-31

B-32

B-24

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEV

ATI

ON

IN F

EET

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEVA

TION

IN FEET

30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270

Plan View

Strata symbols

Silt

PARTIALLY WEATHERED

ROCK

Topsoil


HORIZONTAL


DATE DRAWN


Publix Site


Soil Profile I

ARP/FLG

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 4

:42:

15 P

M

B-25

B-33

B-35

B-35

B-33

B-25

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEV

ATI

ON

IN F

EET

660

655

650

645

640

635

ELEVA

TION

IN FEET

100 200 300 400

Plan View

Strata symbols

Topsoil

Silt

Silty sand

PARTIALLY WEATHERED

ROCK


HORIZONTAL


DATE DRAWN


Publix Site


Soil Profile J

ARP/FLG

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 4

:47:

04 P

M

Scal

e

DES

IGN

ED B

YC

HEC

KED

BY

JOB

NU

MB

ER

DR

AW

N B

Y

DA

TE

NO

.D

ATE

BY

ISSU

E

AS

S

HO

WN

04

-2

3-1

45

08

6

BO

RIN

G L

OC

AT

ION

PLA

N A

PUB

LIX

SIT

EIN

DIA

N T

RA

IL, N

C 2

8079

AR

IST

A D

EV

EL

OPM

EN

T, L

LC

520

PRO

VID

EN

CE

HIG

HW

AY

, SU

ITE

9N

OR

WO

OD

, MA

020

62JH

RJL

RJL

R

00 60' 120'

60'

PRELIMINARYNOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

OLD CHARLOTTE HWY.

SR 1009

115' PLANNED RIGHT OF WAY

WE

SLE

Y C

HA

PE

L-S

TO

UT

S R

D.

SR

1377

115' P

LA

NN

ED

R

IG

HT

O

F W

AY

SITE INFORMATION

AREA 22.70 ACRES

EXISTING ZONING SF-1 / O-VC

PROPOSED ZONING GBD / O-VC

FRONT SETBACK 25 FT.

SIDE SETBACK 15 FT.

REAR SETBACK 12.5 FT.

N/F: RONALD P BARNETTE

PARCEL ID - 07069001

DB 931 PG 610

ZONING - SF-1

PARCELS THAT MAKE UP THE PROPOSED SITE INCLUDE:

07072011 HANEY THOMAS JACKSON JR ET AL

07072011A GOODWIN DONALD WAYNE & KAY V DB 0283 PG 675

07072004 NIKOPOULOUS ANN DB 5508 PG 117

07072004A NIKSONS LLC DB 1486 PG 108

07072005 HELMS MARVIN GLENN & BETTY DB 0204 PG 231

07072006 HELMS MARVIN GLENN & BETTY DB 0168 PG 500

07072007 LIQUID MANAGEMENT LLC DB 3676 PG 808

07072008 LIQUID MANAGEMENT LLC DB 3676 PG 808

07072009 B-F UNION PROPERTIES LLP DB 4938 PG 344

07072010 SUGGS THOMAS ADAM & WF REBECCA L DB 1974 PG 299

07072017 BLACK DIAMOND HOMES LLC DB 5460 PG 021

07072018 BLACK DIAMOND HOMES LLC DB 5999 PG 589

25' FRONT BUILDING

SETBACK

25' F

RO

NT

B

UILD

IN

G

SE

TB

AC

K

2

5

'

L

A

N

D

S

C

A

P

E

B

U

F

F

E

R

(

T

Y

P

.

)

25' LA

ND

SC

AP

E B

UF

FE

R (T

YP

.)

57.5'

25'

57.5'25'

PROPOSED WATER

QUALITY / DETENTION

POND LOCATION

NEW RESIDENTIAL

300+ UNITS

EXISTING SIGNALIZED

INTERSECTION

EXISTING SIGNALIZED

INTERSECTION

PROPOSED

DRIVEWAY

EXISTING SIGNALIZED

INTERSECTION

PROPOSED WATER

QUALITY / DETENTION

POND LOCATION

LANDSCAPE BUFFER

PROPOSED PROPERTY LINE

N/F: THOMAS JACKSON HANEY JR. et. al.


NO DEED REFERENCE FOUND

ZONING - SF-1

N/F: W. H. & TOMMIE RUTH D GAY


DB 303 PG 666

ZONING - SF-1

25 FT.

FUTURE DRIVE FOR

RESIDENTIAL DEVELOPMENT

PUBLIX DRIVE THRU

REQUIRED

25 FT.

N/A

65.5 FT.

25 FT.

PROVIDED

6

5

.

5

'

3

0

'

30'

30'

3

0

'

3

0

'

6

0

'

1

0

'

(

T

Y

P

.

)

20'

10' (T

YP

.)

6

0

'

10' SIDEWALK ALONG

PROJECT FRONTAGE(TYP.)

10' SIDEWALK ALONG

PROJECT FRONTAGE(TYP.)

6

0

'

6

0

'

6

0

'

6

0

'

N/F: DONALD W. & KAY V.

GOODWIN

PARCEL ID - 07072011A

DB 283 PG 675

ZONING - SF-1

N/F: THOMAS A. & REBECCA L.

SUGGS


DB 1974 PG 299

ZONING - SF-1

N/F: B-F UNION PROPERTIES, LLP


DB 4938 PG 344

ZONING - SF-1

N/F: LIQUID MANAGEMENT, LLC


DB 3676 PG 808

ZONING - SF-1

N/F: LIQUID MANAGEMENT, LLC


DB 3676 PG 808

ZONING - SF-1

N/F: KAY FRANCIS H. ALBACH


DB W13E PG 933

ZONING - SF-1

N/F: KAY FRANCIS H. ALBACH


DB W13E PG 933

ZONING - SF-1

N/F: NIKSONS, LLC

PARCEL ID - 07072004A

DB 1486 PG 108

ZONING - GBD

N/F: ANN NIKOPOULOUS


DB 5508 PG 117

ZONING - GBD

N/F: BLACK DIAMOND HOMES, LLC


DB 5460 PG 21

ZONING - SF-1

N/F: BLACK DIAMOND HOMES, LLC


DB 5999 PG 589

ZONING - SF-1

30'

30'

3

0

'

60'

60'

60'

60'

60'

60'

60'

60'

6

0

'

24'

24'

9' TYP.

9' TYP.

9' TYP.

9

'

T

Y

P

.

2

4

'

3

0

'

24'

9' TYP.

3

0

'

NOT TO SCALE

Vicinity Map

Site

*

1.04

/30/

14JL

RR

EVIS

E B

UIL

DIN

G 8

& 1

0; A

DD

PED

ESTR

IAN

CO

NN

ECTI

VIT

Y

- 10' BORING (2)

- 15' BORING (13)

- 20' BORING (20)

B-1

B-3

B-5

B-2

B-4

B-6

B-7

B-8

B-17

B-18

B-16

B-14

B-13

B-12

B-11

B-10

B-9

B-15

B-19

B-20

B-21

B-23

B-22

B-24

B-32

B-25

B-26

B-30

B-31

B-29

B-27

B-28

B-34

B-33

B-35

SOIL PROFILE A

SOIL PROFILE B

SOIL PROFILE C

SOIL PROFILE D

SOIL PROFILE F

SOIL PROFILE E

SOIL PROFILE G

SOIL PROFILE H

SOIL PROFILE I

SOIL PROFILE J

X:\L

and

Proj

ects

R2\

5086

Pub

lix S

ite -

Indi

an T

rail\

dwg\

5086

Bor

ing

Plan

- L

ifest

yle

Plan

A.D

WG

, 5/1

3/20

14 5

:05:

02 P

M


GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 00 72 00 - 1

SECTION 00 72 00 - GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A-201, 2007 Edition, shall be the form of General Conditions and the Supplementary Condition are provided by the Owner.



GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 00 72 00 - 2


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.2. Work covered by Contract Documents.3. Work under separate contracts.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Shoppes at Hanfield Village – Building 4.

1. Project Location: See Contract Documents for location and cross streets.

B. Owner: Arista Development, LLC 520 Providence Highway, Norwood MA 02062

1. Owner's Representative: John Stewart Construction Manager 617 549 4857

C. Architect: Little Diversified Architectural Consultants (Little) Kevin Laundry 704 561 3235.

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. See Construction Documents for contact information.

E. Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by Construction Manager will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage.

1. See Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for establishing administering and using the Project Web site.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

Construction of single story retail space in new shopping center. Type II-B construction, Sprinklered. In new shopping center located at intersection of Wesley Chapel Stouts Rd. and Old Charlotte Hwy, Indian Trail, Union County NC.

B. Type of Contract:


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours approved by Owner, Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

D. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

E. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 3

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 4


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1

SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue through Construction Manager supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Construction Manager will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Construction Manager are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner.



B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Construction Manager.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form provided by Owner.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.

B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Construction Manager will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect Construction Manager may issue a ConstructionChange Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.









PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.b. Submittal schedule.c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect through Construction Manager at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment.

4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element.

5. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design services contract as described in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.



1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location.b. Name of Architect.c. Architect's project number.d. Contractor's name and address.e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division.b. Description of the Work.c. Name of subcontractor.d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.e. Name of supplier.f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor.2) Materials.3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of 10 percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling 10 percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.



1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and Construction Managerand paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the <Insert day> of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the [last day of the month] <Insert specific day of the month>.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment <Insert number> days prior to due date for review by Architect and Construction Manager.

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702/CMa and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included in Project Manual.

F. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Construction Manager and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.

G. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Construction Manager will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

H. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:



a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

I. Transmittal: Submit <Insert number> signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Construction Manager by a method ensuring receipt[ within 24 hours]. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

J. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers.4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

K. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers.4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from

every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.

L. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.2. Schedule of values.3. Sustainable design submittal for project materials cost data.4. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).5. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work

of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor.6. Products list (preliminary if not final).7. Sustainable design action plans.8. Schedule of unit prices.9. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).10. List of Contractor's staff assignments.11. List of Contractor's principal consultants.12. Copies of building permits.



13. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work.

14. Initial progress report.15. Report of preconstruction conference.16. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.17. Performance and payment bonds.18. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

M. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

N. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."7. Evidence that claims have been settled.8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.







CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule.2. Daily construction reports.3. Site condition reports.4. Special reports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.2. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire constructionperiod. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.




A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.3. Discuss constraints, including work stages area separations interim milestones.4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.6. Review submittal requirements and procedures.7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies.9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures.10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date ofSubstantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 5 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.



3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 5 days for startup and testing.5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's and Construction Manager'sadministrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 15 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.2. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include

delivery date indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with adjacent construction.b. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.c. Use of premises restrictions.d. Provisions for future construction.e. Seasonal variations.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. See Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues.2. Unanswered Requests for Information.3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.4. Notations on returned submittals.5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.



2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.2. List of separate contractors at Project site.3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.4. Equipment at Project site.5. Material deliveries.6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow.7. Accidents.8. Meetings and significant decisions.9. Unusual events (see special reports).10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.11. Meter readings and similar recordings.12. Emergency procedures.13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.14. Change Orders received and implemented.15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.16. Services connected and disconnected.17. Equipment or system tests and startups.18. Partial completions and occupancies.19. Substantial Completions authorized.

2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At 2-week intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.



3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Manager, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.





SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and Construction Manager and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.



a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format on cover page:

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect and Construction Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,containing the following information:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name and address of Architect.



d. Name of Construction Manager.e. Name of Contractor.f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.h. Category and type of submittal.i. Submittal purpose and description.j. Specification Section number and title.k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items.l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.n. Related physical samples submitted directly.o. Indication of full or partial submittal.p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.r. Other necessary identification.s. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

a. Project name.b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.c. Manufacturer name.d. Product name.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect and Construction Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's and

Construction Manager's action stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Construction Manager's action stamp.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically established for Project.

a. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

b. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.b. Manufacturer's product specifications.c. Standard color charts.d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.e. Testing by recognized testing agency.f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.g. Notation of coordination requirements.h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.b. Printed performance curves.c. Operational range diagrams.d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.



1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.b. Schedules.c. Compliance with specified standards.d. Notation of coordination requirements.e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.b. Prepare Shop Drawings in the following format: PDF Format. c. Refer to Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for

requirements for coordination drawings.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.b. Product name and name of manufacturer.c. Sample source.d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor."

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.



a. Number of Samples: Submit [three] sets of Samples. Architect and Construction Manager will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.3. Number and name of room or space.4. Location within room or space.5. Submit product schedule in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00"Project Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00"Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

N. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.



O. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

P. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect and Construction Manager.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00"Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect and Construction Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect and Construction Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect and Construction Manager.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.





QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.

C. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

D. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

E. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.



F. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

G. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.3. Description of test and inspection.4. Identification of applicable standards.



5. Identification of test and inspection methods.6. Number of tests and inspections required.7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.8. Requirements for obtaining samples.9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.2. Project title and number.3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.7. Identification of product and Specification Section.8. Complete test or inspection data.9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements.12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.



B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality Control Services required by Owner or Agency Having Jurisdiction: See drawings and individual specifications section for specific tests and inspections.

1. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."



D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

I. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:



1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1

SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in theConditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.



B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100www.iapmo.org

ICBO International Conference of Building Officials(See ICC)

ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc.(See ICC-ES)

ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials)www.iccsafe.org

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543

NES National Evaluation Service(See ICC-ES)

SBCCI(See ICC)







TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

E. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

1. One trailer for entire construction site, if only one contractor doing work.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 12 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square tack and marker boards.

3. Drinking water and private toilet.4. Coffee machine and supplies.5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg F.6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."



B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Install electric power service per utility requirements. Contractor is responsible for all permits, fees and hook up assemblies.

2. At end of project, remove temporary electric power service and remove from premises in accordance with local utility requirements.

G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign, if Sign is provided.

H. Telephone Service: Provide telephone service facilities for use by all construction personnel. .

1. Provide access to telephone line(s) for Owner's use2. At each public area, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments.b. Ambulance service.c. Contractor's home office.



d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.e. Architect's office.f. Engineers' offices.g. Owner's office.h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

I. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."



3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

B. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage.2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.4. Remove standing water from decks.5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.



5. Do not install material that is wet.6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

B. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.




A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.



2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered.

3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.



1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1

SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.2. Field engineering and surveying.3. Installation of the Work.4. Cutting and patching.5. Progress cleaning.6. Starting and adjusting.7. Protection of installed construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.



a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.

F. Final Property Survey: Submit pdf and 3 signed copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.b. Fire separation assemblies.c. Air barriers.d. Fire-suppression systems.e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.f. Control systems.g. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.h. Electrical wiring systems.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, barriers.b. Membranes and flashings.c. Exterior storefront construction.d. Equipment supports.e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.f. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.



4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.



1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floor, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work.2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site.3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions.4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.



5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.6. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels

exceed allowable tolerances.7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect or Construction Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect and Construction Manager before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.



1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in

unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.



J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill.4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations.5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.



3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.



F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensureoperability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00"Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 10


CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following:

1. Demolition Waste:

a. Asphalt paving.b. Concrete.



c. Concrete reinforcing steel.d. Brick.e. Concrete masonry units.f. Wood studs.g. Wood joists.h. Plywood and oriented strand board.i. Wood trim.j. Structural and miscellaneous steel.k. Rough hardware.l. Roofing.m. Insulation.n. Doors and frames.o. Door hardware.p. Windows.q. Glazing.r. Metal studs.s. Gypsum board.t. Acoustical tile and panels.u. Carpet.v. Carpet pad.w. Equipment.x. Cabinets.y. Plumbing fixtures.z. Piping.aa. Supports and hangers.bb. Valves.cc. Sprinklers.dd. Mechanical equipment.ee. Refrigerants.ff. Electrical conduit.gg. Copper wiring.hh. Lighting fixtures.ii. Lamps.jj. Ballasts.kk. Electrical devices.ll. Switchgear and panelboards.mm. Transformers.

2. Construction Waste:

a. Masonry and CMU.b. Lumber.c. Wood sheet materials.d. Wood trim.e. Metals.f. Roofing.g. Insulation.h. Carpet and pad.i. Gypsum board.j. Piping.k. Electrical conduit.l. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph

above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:



1) Paper.2) Cardboard.3) Boxes.4) Plastic sheet and film.5) Polystyrene packaging.6) Wood crates.7) Plastic pails.


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.


A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste and Form CWM-8 for demolition waste. Include the following information:

1. Material category.2. Generation point of waste.3. Total quantity of waste in tons.4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total

waste.

B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced person or firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements.



B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator.

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.

4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition site-clearing andconstruction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste andForm CWM-2 for demolition waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste andForm CWM-4 for demolition waste. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 01 50 00"Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor.

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.



a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or

processor.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Asphalt Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum 4-inch size.

B. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.

C. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 4-inch size.2. Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth

Moving" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase.

D. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 1-1/2-inch size.

a. Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Section 32 93 00"Plants" for use as mineral mulch.

2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.

E. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

F. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

G. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts. Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.

H. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

I. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

J. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.

K. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips.



1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

L. Carpet Tile: Remove debris, trash, and adhesive.

1. Stack tile on pallet and store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

M. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

N. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



3.6 FORM IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. General: Label Contractor’s forms as follows:

1. Form CWM-1 for construction waste identification.2. Form CWM-2 for demolition waste identification.3. Form CWM-3 for construction waste reduction work plan.4. Form CWM-4 for demolition waste reduction work plan.5. Form CWM-5 cost/revenue analysis of construction waste reduction work plan.6. Form CWM-6 cost/revenue analysis of demolition waste reduction work plan.7. Form CWM-7 for construction waste8. Form CWM-8 for demolition waste.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.2. Final completion procedures.3. Warranties.4. Final cleaning.5. Repair of the Work.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.



B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Construction Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Construction Manager's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted.7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders.8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.



1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.d. Name of Contractor.e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Or

b. PDF electronic file. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file.



1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inchpaper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.



c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

d. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent.k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

l. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.



a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1

SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.2. Emergency manuals.3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.4. Product maintenance manuals.5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.



C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit electronically in pdf format, each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copieselectronically of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.2. List of systems.3. List of equipment.4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.2. Table of contents.3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.2. Name and address of Project.3. Name and address of Owner.4. Date of submittal.



5. Name and contact information for Contractor.6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.7. Name and contact information for Architect.8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals.10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.2. Emergency instructions.3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.2. Flood.3. Gas leak.4. Water leak.5. Power failure.6. Water outage.7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.8. Chemical release or spill.



C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.3. Operating standards.4. Operating procedures.5. Operating logs.6. Wiring diagrams.7. Control diagrams.8. Piped system diagrams.9. Precautions against improper use.10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name.3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.4. Equipment function.5. Operating characteristics.6. Limiting conditions.7. Performance curves.8. Engineering data and tests.9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.3. Routine and normal operating instructions.4. Regulation and control procedures.5. Instructions on stopping.6. Normal shutdown instructions.7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.9. Special operating instructions and procedures.



D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Color, pattern, and texture.4. Material and chemical composition.5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.



B. Source Information: List each system, and piece of major equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly.3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.2. Troubleshooting guide.3. Precautions against improper maintenance.4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements (if stipulated in Specifications) with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.



B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39"Project Record Documents."

F. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.





PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.2. Record Specifications.3. Record Product Data.4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints.2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and two set(s) of prints.2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

c. Final Submittal:

1) Submit record digital data files and three set(s) of record digital data file plots.

2) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.



1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report monthly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c. Depths of foundations below first floor.d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.g. Actual equipment locations.h. Duct size and routing.i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.



5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect and Construction Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution.4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for

use in recording information.

a. See Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.

b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect and Construction Manager for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.



1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary toprovide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.



B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.





CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings.2. Slabs-on-grade.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support formwork.

E. Slab-on-Grade Control Joint Layout: Indicate proposed slab-on-grade control joint layout.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, minimum 5 years experience with similar projects and complexity.



B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.2. Admixtures.3. Form materials and form-release agents.4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.5. Bonding agents.6. Vapor retarders.7. Semirigid joint filler.8. Joint-filler strips.

C. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA):

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: To include:

a. Term: Life of the concrete.b. Repair and/or removal of failed flooring.c. Placement of a topical moisture remediation system.d. Replacement of flooring/roofing materials like original installed to include material

and labor.

2. Adhesion Warranty: MVRA Manufacturer shall provide an adhesion warranty to match the term of the adhesive and/or primer manufacturer's material defect warranty upon MVRA manufacturer's acceptance of field bond test.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.



2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 75 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

D. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.

E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

F. All steel products shall be produced using the electric arc furnace production method unless it is not available within 500 miles of the project site.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal.2. Recycled Concrete Alternate: Contractor may propose alternate to use recycled concrete

as portion of coarse aggregate in foundations.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.



1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.7. Moisture Vapor-Reducing Admixture (MVRA): Concrete moisture vapor reduction

admixture for all interior slabs-on-grade shall be a non-toxic, liquid admixture that is specifically designed to have a natural chemical reaction with pre-existing elements inside the concrete to eliminate the route of moisture vapor emission through the slab by restricting the integral capillary system Meeting ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type S.

a. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide BarrierOne, Inc.; Barrier One High Performance Concrete Admixture or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Specialty Products Group.2) Moxie International.

b. Provide the above named product or, upon approval of the Architect/Structural Engineer, provide a product that meets or exceeds the below project specific performance requirements at the expense of the concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA) manufacturer:

1) Project specific quality control process to include but not limited to:

a) Independent procurement of one cylinder per day of placement of concrete containing MVRA; do not proceed without MVRA representative being present.

b) Independent testing of all cylinders for hydraulic conductivity per ASTM D5084.

c) Assessing each cylinder for maximum flow of 6.0 E-08 cm/sec.d) Should any cylinder exceed the maximum flow, procure a core from

that day’s placement. e) Independently test core for hydraulic conductivity per ASTM D5084.f) Should any core exceed the maximum flow, provide a topical

moisture mitigation system for all areas not meeting the stated limit; moisture mitigation system to include all labor, material and warranty that meets or exceeds the terms of the concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture manufacturer’s warranty.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BoMetals, Inc.b. Greenstreak.c. Paul Murphy Plastics Company.d. Vinylex Corp.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1162&mf=04&mf=95&src=pdf&mf=&src=pdf

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456801536&mf=&src=pdf






2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick; nontapered.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400.b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15.c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120.d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16.e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil.f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15.g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-105 15 mil Green.h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.

2.8 BELOW-GRADE INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Atlas.b. Dow Chemical Company (The).c. Owens Corning.

2. Type VI, 40 psi at below grade conditions.

2.9 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. Bonded HDPE or Polyethylene Sheet for Blindside Horizontal Applications: Uniform, flexible, multilayered-composite sheet membrane consisting of either an HDPE film coated with pressure-sensitive adhesive and protective release liner, total 46-milthickness, or a cross-laminated film of low- and medium-density polyethylene, coated with a modified asphalt layer and a nonwoven geotextile-fabric final layer, total 95-milthickness; with the following physical properties:

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Grace Construction Products; Preprufe 200 or comparable by an available manufacturer.

2. Tensile Strength, Film: 2000 psiminimum; ASTM D 412.3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg F; ASTM D 1970.4. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 903, modified.5. Lap Adhesion: 2.5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 1876, modified.6. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 feet; ASTM D 5385, modified.7. Puncture Resistance: 200 lbfminimum; ASTM E 154.8. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.01 permsmaximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water Method.9. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent maximum; ASTM D 570.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1166&mf=04&mf=95&src=pdf&mf=&src=pdf









http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4649&mf=04&mf=95&src=pdf&mf=04&src=pdf

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456799691&mf=04&&mf=04&src=pdf

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456799692&mf=04&&mf=04&src=pdf



B. Mastic, Adhesives, and Detail Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

C. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.



D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.5. Use Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA) in all interior slabs-on-grade.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before

adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inchnominal maximum aggregate size.

B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before

adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inchnominal maximum aggregate size.

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd..3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

D. Suspended Slabs: Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi at 28 days.2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 112lb/cu. ft., plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. as determined

by ASTM C 567.3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."



2.15 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.



L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.



C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.



3.8 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior walls.

3.9 SELF-ADHERING SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Install bonded blindside sheet waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels over substrate. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity.

C. Horizontal Applications: Install sheet with face against substrate. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by membrane manufacturer. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger and tape end laps to ensure watertight installation.

D. Corners: Seal lapped terminations and cut edges of sheet waterproofing at inside and outside corners with detail tape.

E. Seal penetrations through sheet waterproofing to provide watertight seal with detail tape patches or wraps and a liquid-membrane troweling.

F. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to produce a continuous watertight tie into adjacent waterproofing.

G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Tape perimeter of damaged or nonconforming area extending 6 inchesbeyond repaired areas in all directions. Apply a patch of sheet waterproofing and firmly secure with detail tape.

3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.



D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.11 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.



1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.12 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inchin one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.



B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.2. Construct concrete bases 6 inches high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base not

less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.

3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base, and anchor into structural concrete substrate.6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper

attachment to supported equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.14 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Below-Grade Insulation: Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water.b. Continuous water-fog spray.c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.



2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

3.15 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints.Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.



D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.2. Steel reinforcement welding.3. Headed bolts and studs.4. Verification of use of required design mixture.5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.



a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.



14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of finishing.





UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 1

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

1. Concrete masonry units.2. Mortar and grout.3. Reinforcing steel.4. Masonry joint reinforcement.5. Ties and anchors.6. Embedded flashing.7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.8. Cavity-wall insulation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

B. Cavity Wall: A multi-wythe noncomposite masonry wall, with or without insulation, with a continuous air space within the wall which is tied together with metal ties.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."

2. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing and locations of special shapes.3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures available for each different exposed masonry unit required.

2. Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available.3. Brick Samples showing the full range of colors.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction.

2. Colored mortar Samples for each color required, showing the full range of colors expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used.



3. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color.4. Accessories embedded in the masonry.

E. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents, unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of the Architect and approved in writing.

F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated:

1. Each type of masonry unit required.

a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances.

b. Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive strength of masonry units.

2. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.

H. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements:

1. Each type of masonry unit required.

a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances.

b. Include test data, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive strength of masonry units.

2. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.

3. Each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type. Include statement of net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

4. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.5. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.6. Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory.7. Integral water repellent system.

a. Provide concrete masonry unit manufacturer’s “Dryblock” prequalification certificate from W.R. Grace.

b. Manufacturer of water repellent concrete masonry units shall certify that units have been manufactured with specified water repellent products which meet specified test requirements. Concrete masonry unit manufacturer shall submit a copy of the invoice from the water repellent manufacturer indicating the quantity and type of water repellent material purchased by the concrete unit masonry manufacturer for this Project. Invoice shall bear the signature and phone number of the local representative for the water repellent manufacturer.



c. Certify that water repellent mortar has been manufactured with specified water repellent products that meet specified test requirements. Contractor shall submit a copy of the invoice from the water repellent manufacturer indicating the quantity and type of water repellent material purchased by the Contractor for this Project. Invoice shall bear the signature and phone number of the local representative for the water repellant manufacturer.

I. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.

J. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following preconstruction testing:

1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 140.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings."


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.



D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,

secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings.4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.

1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry from net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: Per structural Drawings.2. For Brick Unit Masonry: f'm = Per structural Drawings..

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless indicated as bullnose.

B. Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:

1. Concrete masonry units shall not contain cinders and shall be free of organic impurities that will cause rusting, staining, or pop-outs.

2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi.

3. Weight Classification: Normal weight.4. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.5. Size (Width): Manufactured to the dimensions as shown on Drawings.

6. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Concrete Masonry Unit: Color as selected by Architect.

C. Non-load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 129.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.

D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other

sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.



G. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

H. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

I. Water: Potable.

J. Mortar Colors: Custom colors as selected by Architect.

2.4 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60.

2.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows:

1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for both interior and exterior walls.2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter.3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter.4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.188-inch diameter.5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units where

indicated.

B. For single-wythe masonry, provide ladder type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.

C. For multiwythe masonry, provide types as follows:

1. Tab type with single pair of side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of backup wythe and rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. Size ties to extend at least halfway through outer wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

2. Adjustable (2-piece) type with single pair of side rods and cross ties spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. and with separate adjustable veneer ties engaging the cross ties. Cross ties are either U-shaped with eyes or rectangular. Space side rods for embedment within each face shell of backup wythe and size adjustable ties to extend at least halfway through outer wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

a. Use where indicated and where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with those of backup wythe.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.



C. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.

D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.7 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STEEL FRAME

A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire anchor section for welding to steel

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.1875-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2.8 ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO CONCRETE

A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section: Dovetail anchor section formed from 0.0528-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.25-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2.9 RIGID ANCHORS

A. General: Fabricate from steel bars as follows:

1. As indicated.2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153.

2.10 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS

A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows:

1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.

B. Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 3 exposed threads, and with the following corrosion protective coating:

1. Organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117.



C. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than three exposed threads.

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

a. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.; D/A 213S.b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; X-Seal-Seismiclip.c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America; RJ-711 with Wire-Bond clip.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron inserts of type and size indicated.

B. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.0336-inch, galvanized steel sheet.

C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations:

1. Headed bolts.2. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated.

2.12 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” and as follows:

1. Exposed Flashing and Partial Exposed:

a. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.016 inch.

B. Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwiseindicated:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing consisting of 7-oz./sq. ft. sheet copper bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing:



a. Copper Fabric Flashing; Advanced Building Products, Inc.b. Copper Fabric; AFCO Products, Inc.c. H & B C-Fab Flashing; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.d. Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper; Phoenix Building Products.e. Copper Fabric Flashing; Polytite Manufacturing Corp.f. Copper Fabric Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.g. York Copper Fabric Flashing; York Manufacturing, Inc.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or urethane.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

1. Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Cell Vents: Composite cellular vents consisting of small passageways bonded together. 3/8 inch wide by 2 –1/2 inch deep by 3-3/8 inch long.

E. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, designed to fill head joint with outside face held back 1/8 inch from exterior face of masonry, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

F. Cavity Drainage Material: 2-inch-thick, free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings.

G. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.

2.14 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular, polystyrene thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high-density skin; formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578, Type X.

B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.

2.15 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.



2.16 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of

weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime.2. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S.3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight:

1. For mineral-oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent.2. For carbon-black pigment and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 2 percent.3. For mineral-oxide pigments and mortar cement mortar, not more than 5 percent.4. For carbon-black pigment and mortar cement mortar, not more than 1 percent.

E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates combined with selected cementitious materials.

1. Mix to match to custom color as selected by Architect.

F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143.

2.17 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing indicated below:

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.2. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's

expense.

B. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 67.



C. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 140.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections.


A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of the Specifications.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening.

D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the time of laying.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:



B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inchmaximum.

C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.

D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.

E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

1. As indicated on Drawings.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated.



1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

2. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "Firestopping."

J. All interior masonry walls shall be braced to roof or floor structure above, as indicated.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows:

1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns,

and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,

including areas under cells.

B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the brick.

C. Set stone trim units in full bed of mortar with vertical joints slushed full. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes solid. Wet stone-joint surface thoroughly before setting; for soiled stone surfaces, clean bedding and exposed surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY

A. Use masonry joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints to bond wythes together.

B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated "L" joint reinforcement units as well as masonry bonding.

C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows:

1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units.2. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. If used with hollow masonry

units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.



3.7 CAVITIES

A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.

1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.

B. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing."

C. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 incheso.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.

1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry.

3.8 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

A. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units.

3.9 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls,

unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 24 inches beyond openings, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.



2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 incheso.c. horizontally.

3.11 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing or concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to wall framing with two metal fasteners of type indicated.

2. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.

4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 incheso.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around the perimeter.

3.12 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Generally, install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.2. Where indicated, install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker

strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint.

C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Keep joint free and clear of mortar.

D. Build in horizontal, pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.

3.13 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.



3.14 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

C. Install flashing as follows:

1. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up a minimum 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up face of sheathing at least 8 inches, and behind air-infiltration barrier or building paper.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches to form a pan.

4. Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inchback from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge.

5. Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

6. Cut flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use open head joints.2. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities full height of cavity.

3.15 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure.



1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.


A. Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing indicated below.

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.2. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's

expense.

B. Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780.

C. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.

D. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 67.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 140.

F. Special Inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

G. Testing: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. feet of wall area.

3.17 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Remove effloresce from unit masonry walls. 3. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

4. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.

5. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.



6. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20, Table 1, using job-mixed detergent solution or proprietary cleaner, applied according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

3.18 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00 - 1

SECTION 04 72 00 - CAST STONE MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cast stone quoins, molding, and special trim units.2. Reinforcement, anchorages, and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. For cast stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces.

1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute. With a minimum of five years of experience.

B. Installer: Minimum of five years of experience documented similar to project scope.


A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.

1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.

2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.



C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than seven days after completing cleaning.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAST STONE MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following:

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce cast stone color indicated.

C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.

D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.

E. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of cast stone material.

1. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M.

F. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

2.2 CAST STONE UNITS

A. Regional Materials: Cast stone units shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.



B. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast method.

1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.

C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.3. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch.2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the

length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch.3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is

greater.4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary

from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces.

E. Cure units as follows:

1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and temperature of 100 deg F for 12 hours or 70 deg F for 16 hours.

2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following:

a. No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above.b. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above.c. No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above.d. No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above.

F. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.

G. Colors and Textures: To match existing.

2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar, cement, and lime shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.



E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

F. Water: Potable.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Dowels: 1/2-inch- diameter, round bars, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

2.5 MORTAR MIXES

A. Do not use admixtures including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.2. Use portland cement-lime or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

1. For setting mortar, use Type S.2. For pointing mortar, use Type N.


A. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone units according to ASTM C 1364.

1. Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."



3.2 SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTS

A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place.

2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations indicated with uniform joints.

B. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of cast stone units and backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout.

C. Fill anchor holes with sealant.

1. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels.

D. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.

E. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored. Do not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed.

1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch.

F. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated.

G. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section Joint Sealants.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inchmaximum.

B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inchmaximum.

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch, except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances specified.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.



B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.

1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows:


2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone.

3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

6. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.



ADHERED MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER 04 73 00 - 1

SECTION 04 73 00 – ADHERED MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Simulated masonry veneer adhered to wood framing and sheathing.2. Simulated masonry veneer adhered to cold-formed metal framing and sheathing.

B. Products installed but not furnished in this Section include the following:

1. Steel lintels and steel shelf angles for simulated masonry veneer specified in Division 05 Section Metal Fabrications.


A. Product Data: For each variety of simulated masonry, simulate masonry accessory, and manufactured products specified.

1. Include data on physical properties of manufactured masonry units.

B. Samples: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of simulated masonry required.

1. Include 2 or more Samples in each set showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.

C. Colored Pointing Mortar Samples for Verification: For each color of mortar required.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience installer who has completed simulated masonry veneer similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Project site in undamaged condition.

B. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping or other causes.

1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Protection of simulated masonry veneer: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections and sills with waterproof sheathing at the end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed stone masonry veneer when construction is not in progress.



B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried.

C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect simulated masonry veneer work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F and above.

D. Mock-Ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Owner’s and Architect’s acceptance of finish color, texture and pattern, and workmanship standard. Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner’s approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ADHERED MANUFACTURED MASONRY MANUFACTURERS

A. Eldorado Stone, www.eldoradostone.com

1. Refer to drawings for product.

2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction; natural color or white cement may be used as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows:

1. For joints narrower than ¼ inch, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve.

2. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve.3. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.4. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound

stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

D. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard acrylic-resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.

E. Water: Potable.

http://www.eldoradostone.com/



2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Weep Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inchin diameter.

2. Mesh Weep Holes: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full width of head joint and 2 inches high by thickness of stone masonry; in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

B. Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.

C. Cavity Drainage Stone: Washed gravel or washed crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, No. 6

D. Cavity Drainage Material: 1-inch thick reticulated, nonabsorbent mesh, made from polyethylene strands and shaped to maintain drainage at weep holes without being clogged by mortar droppings.

E. Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933, fabricated into 2-by-2-inch mesh with minimum 0.0625-inch-diameter, galvanized-steel wire.

2.4 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. in area.

B. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following:

1. Thickness: 1 inch plus or minus 1/8 inch.

C. Finish exposed stone faces and edges to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples.

1. Finish: As selected by Architect.

2.6 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers’ written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.

B. Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride.



2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

C. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a consistency similar to that of thick cream.

1. For latex-modified, portland cement, setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.

F. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Unit Masonry: 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, 7 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive simulated masonry veneer, with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation, tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of simulated masonry veneer.

1. Examine substrates to verify that inserts, reinforcement, veneer ties, flashing and other items installed in unit masonry or concrete and required for or extending into simulated masonry veneer are correctly installed.

2. Examine wall framing, sheathing, and asphalt-saturated felt covering to verify that stud locations are suitable for spacing of veneer anchors and that installation will result in a weatherproof covering.

3. Do not proceed with installation until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARTION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of reinforcement, anchors, ties, flashing, and similar items to be built into simulated masonry veneer.

B. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of asphalt-saturated felt before beginning simulated masonry installation.

C. Protect simulated masonry veneer during erection as follows:

1. Cover tops of walls with nonstaining, waterproof sheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold securely in place.

2. Prevent staining of simulated masonry from mortar, grout, sealants and other sources.Immediately remove such materials without damaging masonry.

3. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface.

4. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.



D. Clean simulated masonry surfaces that have become dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean masonry by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushesand then drenching with clear water. Use only cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.

3.3 SETTING STONE MASONRY VENEER, GENERAL

A. Execute simulated masonry veneer by skilled masons experienced with the kind and form of masonry and installation method indicated.

B. Set simulated masonry to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure simulated masonry veneer in place. Set simulated masonry accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

C. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated.

1. Sealing expansion and other joints is specified in Division 07 Section Joint Sealants.2. Keep expansion joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

D. Place weep holes and vents in joints where moisture may accumulate including base of cavity walls, above shelf angles, and flashing. Locate weep holes and vents at intervals not exceeding 24 inches.

3.4 INSTALLING ADHERED MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER

A. Install flashing over sheathing and behind asphalt-saturated felt by fastening through sheathing into framing.

B. Install lath over sheathing and asphalt-saturated felt by fastening through sheathing into framing to comply with ASTM C 1063.

C. Install lath over unit masonry and concrete to comply with ASTM C 1063.

D. Install scratch coat over metal lath 3/8 inch thick to comply with ASTM C 926.

E. Coat backs of simulated masonry units and face of scratch coat with cement-paste bond coat, then butter both surfaces with setting mortar. Use sufficient setting mortar so a slight excess with be forced out the edges of the stone unit as they are set. Tap units into place, completely filling space between units and scratch coat.

F. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch before setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.

3.5 POINTING

A. Prepare simulated masonry joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is formed.




A. Remove and replace simulated masonry veneer of the following description:

1. Broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged simulated masonry. Simulated masonry units may be repaired if the methods and results are approved by Architect.

2. Defective joints.3. Simulated masonry veneer and joints not matching approved samples.4. Simulated masonry veneer not complying with other requirements indicated.

B. Replace in a manner that results in simulated masonry veneer’s matching approved samples complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean simulated masonry veneer as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows:


2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of simulated masonry.

3. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."

E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure simulated masonry veneer is without damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE

A. Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use.



STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 1

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.2. Grout.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.2. Include embedment Drawings.3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.




A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

D. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.2. Direct-tension indicators.3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.4. Nonshrink grout.

E. Source quality-control reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.2. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated.2. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level.

B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.

C. Construction: Braced frame.

D. Shear Connections: Snug tightened, except as noted and connections also in tension or transferring axial load.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

F. All steel products shall be produced using the electric arc furnace production method unless it is not available within 500 miles of the project site.

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable.

1. Configuration: As indicated.2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.



3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.4. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.5. Finish: Plain.

D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M, Grade 50.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.2. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.3. Finish: Plain.

E. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.

F. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected.4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.



2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless noted otherwise.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.7 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.

2.8 PRIMER

A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:



1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

2.10 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded.3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.



3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.2. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, except at braced frames, connections transferring axial load, and unless noted otherwise.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.



3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 - 1

SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. K-series steel joists.2. KCS-type K-series steel joists.3. LH- and DLH-series long-span steel joists.4. Joist accessories.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete.2. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry.3. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for field-welded shear connectors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."

B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications."


A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.2. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and

connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=7




A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications."

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated.

1. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than

the following:

a. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 60 percent.

2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists.




B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

F. Do not camber joists.

G. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications.".

H. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.3 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as indicated.

1. Joist Type: LH-series steel joists.2. End Arrangement: Underslung.3. Top-Chord Arrangement: Parallel.

B. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

C. Camber long-span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications.".

D. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.

2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.

B. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications."



C. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.

1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.

E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

G. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly.

2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section.

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that

joists are stabilized during construction.



4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads are applied.

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research Council on Structural Connection's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.

E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.

B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Visually inspect bolted connections.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements.

E. Perform additional testing to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists abutting structural steel, and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.





STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 1

SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.



C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."





A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc.2. CMC Joist & Deck.3. Epic Metals Corporation.4. Nucor Corp.

B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: As indicated.3. Profile Depth: As indicated.4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.6. Side Laps: Overlapped.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

C. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.


http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=1511

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457015472






D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth where not indicated.

F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

G. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.



3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 incheslong, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per

deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports as indicated.

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches apart with at least one fastener at each corner.

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or mechanically fasten.

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.

F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.

3.4 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an

average of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart.3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.



C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.





COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 1

SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.


A. Sustainable Design Submittals:


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Research Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."





A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.2. Marino\WARE.3. Nuconsteel, A Nucor Company.4. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.5. Steel Construction Systems.6. Steel Network, Inc. (The).7. Steeler, Inc.8. United Metal Products, Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00"Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing.

B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated.2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections

greater than the following:

a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 1 inch.

5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:












1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.2. Wall Studs: AISI S211.3. Headers: AISI S212.4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance.2. Coating: G60, A60, AZ50, or GF30.

C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance.2. Coating: G60.

2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch.2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch.2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches minimum.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.


a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.b. Marino\WARE.c. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.d. Steel Network, Inc. (The).









D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch.2. Flange Width: 1 inch plus twice the design gap for other applications.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch.b. Flange Width: 1 inch plus twice the design gap for other applications.

2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch.b. Flange Width: 4 inch.

F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.

2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing.2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.3. Web stiffeners.4. Anchor clips.5. End clips.6. Foundation clips.7. Gusset plates.8. Stud kickers and knee braces.9. Joist hangers and end closures.10. Hole reinforcing plates.11. Backer plates.

2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.



B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.



a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.



C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches.



C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to building structure.4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings.

2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.





METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors.2. Steel framing and supports for countertops.3. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel channel door opening guards and loading-dock

edge angles.4. Metal ladders.5. Ladder safety cages.6. Pipe bollards.7. Loose steel lintels.8. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.


A. Structural Performance of Ladders:

1. State Building Code, including appendices, with amendments, edition in effect by localgoverning jurisdiction.

2. Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

3. Provide ladders designed and fabricated to conform to requirements of 29 CFR 1910.27 –Fixed Ladders; Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product data for the following:

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.2. Expansion anchors.3. Paint products.4. Grout.



B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."3. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re-certification.


A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 80), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.



D. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M; or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 611, Grade A, unless another grade is required by design loads.

E. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M; or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.

F. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating, either commercial quality or structural quality, Grade 33, unless another grade is required for design loads.

G. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

H. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510.

I. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.

J. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

K. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

2.3 PAINT

A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.

1. Provide fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal red-oxide primer with good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide; FS TT-P-636.

B. Primer Omission: Steel joists receiving spray fire-resistive materials are not to receive prime coatings unless specifically required by spray fire-resistive materials manufacturer.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.



B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1.

G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594, for indoor use only.

I. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.

2.5 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and working time sufficient for proper placement.

1. Minimum 28 day compressive strength: 4000 psi.2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers include

the following:

a. Masterflow 928; BASF Corporation Building Systems.b. 1107 Advantage Grout; Dayton Superior Corporation.c. NS Grout; Euclid Chemical Company (The).d. Five Star Grout; Five Star Products.e. Duragrout; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.f. F-100; Sauereisen.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.



D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

I. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.7 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth of clear span, but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches-wide by 1/4 inch-thick by 8 inches-long at 24 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.



C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated or at all items built into exterior wall construction or with direct exposure to weathering.

D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated or at all items not built into exterior wall construction or with no direct exposure to weathering.

E. Fabricate framing and supports for slotted connections to allow for minimum 1 inch deflection of overhead building structure, when framing and supports attached to overhead structure.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

1. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

B. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim only in the following locations:

1. Exterior locations.

2.10 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.3. Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter steel bars.4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide

granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.

6. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grat-ing, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.

7. Ladder parts shall be factory primed and field painted after installation.

2.11 LADDER SAFETY CAGES

A. General:

1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners.

2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feeto.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches o.c. between primary hoops.



3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages:

1. Refer to drawings.

C. Provide ladder safety cage as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.12 PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.

B. Finish, Exterior Bollards: Hot-dip galvanized, unless noted otherwise.

C. Fabricate bollard for buried anchorage from steel pipe cross-drilled, with 1/2-inch holes for pipe length buried below grade.

D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed; length as indicated.

E. Concrete: Refer to Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for requirements for concrete.

F. Bollard Cover: Protective vinyl sleeves, color as indicated on Drawings.

2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:

1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any.

B. Anchor framing and supports securely to overhead building structure. Provide slotted connections for 1 inch minimum deflection of overhead building structure.

3.3 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Support and brace bollards to be installed in place in position in footing excavations until concrete has been placed and cured. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, full height, to top surface.

B. Install all bollards plumb and level, true to line and elevation.

C. Where indicated, provide domed concrete fill to tops of exterior steel pipe bollards exposed in the final, permanent construction.

D. Finish with vinyl sleeve; color as indicated on drawings.




A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, which ensure metal fabrications are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.





THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed building insulation.2. Exposed building insulation.3. Sound attenuation insulation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.


A. Plenum Rating: Provide slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpmair velocity.

2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation.2. Johns Manville.3. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.

D. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:



1. 3-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.2. 3-5/8 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.3. 5-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 21 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.4. 6-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.5. 9-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 30 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:



1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at

vented eaves.5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced

blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs.

C. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION

A. Install 3-inch-thick, unfaced slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber blanket insulation over suspended ceilings at partitions in a width that extends insulation 48 inches on either side of partition.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07 24 19 - 1

SECTION 07 24 19 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that are field applied over substrate.2. Water-resistive coatings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E 2110 apply to Work of this Section.

B. EIFS: Exterior insulation and finish system(s).

C. IBC: International Building Code.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each EIFS component, trim, and accessory, including water-resistive coatings.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 8 inches square in size.

1. Include exposed trim and accessory Samples to verify color selected.2. Include a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected, as specified in

Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."


A. Qualification Data: For Installer. See requirements of this Section.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by EIFS manufacturer certifying the following:



1. EIFS complies with requirements.2. Substrates to which EIFS is indicated to be attached are acceptable to EIFS

manufacturer.3. Accessory products installed with EIFS, including joint sealants, flashing, water-resistive

coatings, trim, whether or not furnished by EIFS manufacturer and whether or not specified in this Section, are acceptable to EIFS manufacturer.

C. Field quality-control reports and special inspection reports.

D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: [An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers] <Insert requirements>.


A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products.

B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes.

1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Bond integrity and weathertightness.b. Deterioration of EIFS finishes and other EIFS materials beyond normal weathering.



2. Warranty coverage includes the following components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies:

a. EIFS finish, including base coats, finish coats, and reinforcing mesh.b. Insulation installed as part of EIFS including foam build-outs.c. Insulation adhesive and mechanical fasteners.d. EIFS accessories, including trim components and flashing.e. Water-resistive coatings.f. EIFS drainage components.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Senergy.2. Sto Corp.3. Dryvit Systems, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with EIFS components.


A. EIFS Performance: Comply with ASTM E 2568 and with the following:

1. Weathertightness: Resistant to uncontrolled water penetration from exterior, with a means to drain water entering EIFS to the exterior.

2. System Fire Performance: Fire-resistance rating of wall assembly.3. Structural Performance: EIFS assembly and components shall comply with ICC-

ES AC219 when tested according to ASTM E 2568.

a. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure as indicated on Structural Drawings.

4. Impact Performance: ASTM E 2568, Standard impact resistance unless otherwiseindicated.

5. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between EIFS and substrates, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.

6. Abrasion Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample consisting of 1-inch-thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch-thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days and shows no cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand when tested according to ASTM D 968, Method A.

7. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch clean glass substrate; cured for 28 days and shows no growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.







2.3 EIFS MATERIALS

A. Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to protect substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate and insulation adhesive.

B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water-resistive barriers; compatible with substrate and complying with physical and performance criteria of ASTM E 2570.

C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.

D. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use; specifically formulated to be applied to back side of insulation in a manner that creates open vertical channels designed to serve as an integral part of the water-drainage system of the EIFS-clad drainage-wall assembly; compatible with substrate; and complying with one of the following:

1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, and polymer-based adhesive specified for base coat.

2. Factory-blended dry formulation of Portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and fillers specified for base coat.

3. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation designed for adhesive attachment of insulation to substrates of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

E. Drainage Mat: Woven or fused, self-furring, PVC mesh lath mat designed to drain incidental moisture by gravity; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.

F. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; and EIFS manufacturer's requirements for most stringent requirements for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following:

1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks.

2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, according to ASTM E 84.

3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards of not more than 24 by 48 inches and in thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inches thick or less than the thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397.

4. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: As recommended by EIFS manufacturer.5. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: As recommended by EIFS manufacturer.6. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: As recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

G. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard waterproofformulation and complying with one of the following:

1. Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement.

2. For attachment to steel studs from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954.

3. For attachment to light-gage steel framing members not less than 0.0179 inch in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002.



4. For attachment to masonry and concrete substrates, provide sheathing dowel in form of a plastic wing-tipped fastener with thermal cap, sized to fit insulation thickness indicated and to penetrate substrate to depth required to secure anchorage.

H. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparingbase-coat surface for application of finish coat.

I. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating standard acrylic-based coating with enhanced mildew resistance complying with the following:

1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers.

2. Colors: See drawings for finish schedule.3. Textures: See drawings for finish schedule.

J. Sealer: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat.

K. Water: Potable.

L. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard cell class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063.

M. Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work.



B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of substrates.

C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.

1. Concrete Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation installation. Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 1397, ASTM E 2511, and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.

3.4 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION

A. Primer/Sealer: Apply over CMU sheathing substrates and where required by EIFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate.

B. Water-Resistive Coating: Apply over sheathing to provide a water-resistive barrier.

1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where required by EIFS manufacturer. Prime substrates if required and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details.

3.5 TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Coordinate with installation of insulation.

3.6 DRAINAGE MAT INSTALLATION

A. Drainage Mat: Apply wrinkle free, continuously, with edges overlapped and over water-resistive barrier.

3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397 and the following:

1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method, with notches oriented vertically to produce drainage channels that remain functional after the insulation is adhered to substrate.



2. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in coating the entire surface of drainage mat with adhesive once insulation is adhered to drainage mat.

3. Apply adhesive to ridges on back of channeled insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in full adhesive contact over the entire surface of ridges, leaving channels free of adhesive once insulation is adhered to substrate.

4. Apply insulation over substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented horizontally.

5. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels if possible.

6. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from corners of window and door openings.

a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from horizontal and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing.

b. Mechanical Attachment: Offset joints of insulation from horizontal joints in sheathing.

7. Apply channeled insulation with drainage channels aligned vertically.8. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.9. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,

continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material.

10. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated.

11. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/16 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch. Prevent airborne dispersal and immediately collect insulation raspings or sandings.

12. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 3/4 inch.

13. Install foam build-outs and attach to structure.14. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated.15. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges

and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh.

16. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within EIFS and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width indicated.

17. After installing insulation and before applying field-applied reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not less than 2-1/2 inches over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

18. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows:

a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.

b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.



c. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat over face leg of accessories.

19. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-resistive barrier.

B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as follows:

1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS.2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other

EIFS.

3.8 BASE-COAT INSTALLATION

A. Waterproof Adhesive/Base Coat: To exposed surfaces of insulation, apply in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer over foam build-outs.

B. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam build-outs in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-coat thickness.

C. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed reinforcing mesh in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh continuous at corners, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are invisible.

D. Double-Layer Reinforcing-Mesh Application: Where indicated or required, apply second base coat and second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.

E. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings, extending 4 inchesbeyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch-wide, strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches on each side of corners.

1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide.2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh.

F. Foam Build-Outs: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat.

G. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application, except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.

3.9 FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION

A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations.

C. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS manufacturer.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. As stipulated in Ch. 17 of the IBC.

B. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings.





FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 - 1

SECTION 07 27 26 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vapor-retarding, fluid-applied air barriers.2. Vapor-permeable, fluid-applied air barriers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air.

B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.

C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessories applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.



1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.



1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating each substrate; technical data; dry film thickness; and tested physical and performance properties of products.


C. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.

1. Show locations and extent of air-barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions.



2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.

3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors employed by Installer, who work on Project.

B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project.


A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.

1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance.2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.



B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2357.

2.3 MEDIUM-BUILD AIR BARRIERS, VAPOR PERMEABLE

A. Medium-Build, Vapor-Permeable Air Barrier: Synthetic polymer material with an installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written instructions, of 17 to 30 mils over smooth, void-free substrates.


a. Sto Corp.b. W. R. Meadows, Inc.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:

a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.

b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method, Procedure A.

c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 250 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to

ASTM D 4541.e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.f. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 180 days according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air-barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0250 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Pecora Corporation.2. Tremco Incorporated.3. Accessory materials as recommended by air barrier manufacturer.









PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.

2. Verify that substrates have cured and aged for minimum time recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.

3. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test concrete substrates for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching material.

E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.

F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

H. Bridge isolation joints expansion joints and discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and deck-to-deck joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.

3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Install accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.



2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.

3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

B. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

C. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

D. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.

1. Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.2. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame,

and air-barrier material.

F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.

Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch-wide, transition strip.

G. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

H. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.4 PRIMARY AIR-BARRIER MATERIAL INSTALLATION

A. Apply air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details. Apply air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

3. Where multiple prime coats are needed to achieve required bond, allow adequate drying time between coats.




A. ABAA Quality Assurance Program: Perform examinations, preparation, installation, testing, and inspections under ABAA's Quality Assurance Program.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following:

1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes.

2. Air-barrier dry film thickness.3. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided.4. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and

mortar droppings.5. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been

maintained.6. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.7. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable.8. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have

been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.

9. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.10. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate.11. Compatible materials have been used.12. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided.13. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with

requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal.

14. All penetrations have been sealed.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer than recommended, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.



THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 54 23 - 1

SECTION 07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.2. Roof insulation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation.9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.



Mechanically Fastened Thermoplastic Polyolefin Roofing System.



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including:

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roofing, fastening

spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing.4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.



1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Special warranty includes roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, roofing accessories, and other components of roofing system.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.2. Firestone Building Products.3. Johns Manville.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation fasteners for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.


A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.






2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.3 TPO ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform, flexible fabric-backed TPO sheet.

1. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.2. Exposed Face Color: White.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.

E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured by TPO roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.




a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.b. Firestone Building Products.c. Johns Manville.

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

E. R-Value: Minimum of R-25.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with roofing.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Modified asphaltic, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive.

D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inchthick.

2.7 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV.

B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withrequirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking."







3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft., and allow primer to dry.

2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature.

3. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

4. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.



H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

I. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.

1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

J. Install slip sheet over cover board and immediately beneath roofing.

3.5 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.

B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing.

E. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.

G. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.



C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.

3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1

SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim:

1. Manufactured through-wall flashing.2. Formed wall flashing and trim.3. Formed overhead-piping safety pans.


A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and

dimensions.3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim,

including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work.



4. Details of expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

2. Trim: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.3. Accessories: Full-size Sample.


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.


A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows:

1. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604.

1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.



2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft..


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head.

3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.

C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.



2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.

E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.

F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.0250 inch thick.

2.6 FINISHES


B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.





A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.

1. Coat side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.

C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant.

E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.

G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

1. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners.

H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."



I. Aluminum Flashing: Rivet or weld joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.

3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.

1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper.

C. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch below scupper discharge.

D. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight.

B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inchesand bed with elastomeric sealant.

1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:

1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing.

2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping.

3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.



B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of manufactured through-wall flashing is specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drain line.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.





ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00 - 1

SECTION 07 71 00 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following manufactured roof specialties:

1. Copings.2. Roof edge flashings.3. Roof edge drainage systems.4. Counterflashings and reglets.5. Roof curbs.6. Equipment supports.7. Roof hatch.8. Roof screen.


A. General: Manufacture and install manufactured roof specialties to resist thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide manufactured roof specialties that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


C. Water Infiltration: Provide manufactured roof specialties that do not allow water infiltration to building interior.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of manufactured roof specialties, including plans and elevations. Identify factory- vs. field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring manufactured roof specialties including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work.

2. Details for expansion and contraction.



C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of manufactured roof specialties with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace manufactured roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 EXPOSED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and finish indicated, finished as follows:



1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.2. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with

inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.


B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by hot-dip process and prepainted.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.2. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with

inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.


2.3 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand design loads.

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal.

C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.



F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

H. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

1. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft..

2.5 COPINGS

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage, concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps, mitered corner units, and end cap units.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Architectural Products Co.b. ATAS International, Inc.c. Hickman, W. P. Company.d. Merchant & Evans, Inc.e. Metal-Fab Manufacturing LLC.f. Petersen Aluminum Corp.

2. Coping Caps: Snap-on, fabricated from the following exposed metal:

a. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

3. Coping Cap Color: Match existing exterior metals.4. Corners: Mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.5. Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized steel sheet, 12 inches wide,

0.028 inch thick, with integral cleats.6. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized steel sheet.

2.6 ROOF EDGE FLASHINGS

A. Roof Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a continuous formed- or extruded-aluminum anchor bar with integral drip edge cleat to engage fascia cover. Provide matching mitered and welded corner units.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hickman, W. P. Company.b. Metal-Era, Inc.c. MM Systems Corporation.

2. Fascia Cover: Fabricated from the following exposed metal:

a. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

3. Fascia Cover Color: Match existing exterior metals.4. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover.



2.7 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Architectural Products Co.2. ATAS International, Inc.3. Hickman, W. P. Company.4. Merchant & Evans, Inc.5. Metal-Fab Manufacturing LLC.6. Petersen Aluminum Corp.

B. Gutters and Downspouts: Manufactured formed gutter in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with mitered and welded or soldered corner units, end caps, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front gutter rim. Furnish with flat-stock gutter straps and gutter support brackets and expansion joints and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.

1. Fabricate gutter from the following exposed metal:

a. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

2. Gutter Style: Match existing gutter profiles.3. Gutter Accessories: Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame.4. Downspouts: Round with mitered elbows, manufactured from the following exposed

metal. Furnish wall brackets, from same material and finish as downspouts, with anchors.

a. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

2.8 COUNTERFLASHINGS AND REGLETS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cheney Flashing Company.2. Hickman, W. P. Company.3. Merchant & Evans, Inc.4. Metal-Era, Inc.5. MM Systems Corporation.

B. Counterflashings: Manufactured units in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal in thickness indicated:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

C. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashings indicated, from the following exposed metal in thickness indicated:

1. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.2. Type: For masonry application, with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar

joint.



2.9 ROOF CURBS

A. General: Provide roof curbs capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, includingequipment loads and other construction to be supported on roof curbs. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

B. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum 0.0747-inch-thick, structural-quality, hot-dip galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints.

1. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs and formed flange at perimeter bottom for mounting to roof.

2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.3. Provide manufacturer’s standard rigid or semirigid insulation where indicated.4. Provide formed cants and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness.5. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12-inches, unless otherwise, unless otherwise

indicated.6. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1/4-inch per foot, fabricate curb units

with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.

2.10 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

B. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum 0.0747-inch-thick, structural-quality, hot-dip galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints.

1. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs and formed flange at perimeter bottom for mounting to roof.

2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.3. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12-inches, unless otherwise indicated.

2.11 ROOF HATCHES

A. General: Fabricate units to withstand 40-lbf/sq.ft. external and 20-lbf/sq.ft. internal loading pressure. Frame with minimum 9-inch-high, integral-curb, double-wall construction with 1 1/2-inch insulation, formed cants and cap flashing (roofing counterflashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double-wall cover (lid) construction with 1-inch-thick insulation core. Provide gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware including pintle hinges, hold-open devices, interior padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles.

B. Type: Single-leaf personnel access.

C. Material: Galvanized steel sheets.

1. Finish: High-performance organic coating (2 coat system).

D. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1/4-inch per foot, fabricate hatch curbs with height tapered to match slope to level top of units.



2.12 ROOF SCREEN

A. Manufacturer: RoofScreen

B. Roof Screen: 3-inch 24 gage steel rib panel and trim accessories factory finished. Attached with manufacturer’s standard adjustable framing, 6 by 6 inch base supports, flashing, rubber gasket, basecap assembly attaching to steel decking.

C. Panel Color: As selected by Architect.

2.13 FINISHES


B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for manufactured roof specialties.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manufactured roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor manufactured roof specialties securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified in performance requirements. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete manufactured roof specialty systems.

1. Install manufactured roof specialties with provisions for thermal and structural movement.2. Torch cutting of manufactured roof specialties is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.



1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum manufactured roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of manufactured roof specialties directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.

C. Install manufactured roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil-canning, buckling, or tool marks.

D. Install manufactured roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.

E. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed manufactured roof specialties. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no unplanned joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections.

F. Fasteners: Use fasteners of type and size recommended by manufacturer but of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

G. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roofing specialties.

3.3 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor copings to resist uplift and outward forces according to performance requirements.

1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates anchored to substrate at manufacturer's recommended spacing.

2. Interlock face leg drip edge into continuous cleat anchored to substrate at manufacturer's recommended spacing. Anchor back leg of coping with screw fasteners and elastomeric washers at manufacturer's recommended spacing.

3.4 ROOF EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, cant dams, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings to resist uplift and outward forces according to performance requirements.

3.5 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gutters, downspouts to produce a complete roof drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.



B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Attach gutters to firmly anchored straps spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Slope gutters to downspouts.

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps.

2. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, hinged to swing open for cleaning gutters.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.

3.6 COUNTERFLASHING AND REGLET INSTALLATION

A. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of base flashings. Insert counterflashings in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashings. Extend counterflashings 4 inches over base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant.

B. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

3.7 ROOF SCREEN

A. Install roof screen in strict accordance with manufacturer’s installation manual.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as manufactured roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace manufactured roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.





PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 1

SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes penetrating firestopping for penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items:

1. Walls and partitions.2. Gaps around structural members passing through fire rated walls.3. Gap between top of rated walls and the roof/ceiling assembly.


A. General: For the following constructions, provide penetrating firestopping that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings.

2. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings.

B. F-Rated Systems: Provide penetrating firestopping with F-ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide penetrating firestopping with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:

1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings.4. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch-diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross-

sectional area.

D. For penetrating firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.



2. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of penetrating firestopping product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each penetrating firestopping, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each penetrating firestopping configuration for construction and penetrating items.

C. Closeout Records: Signed by installer, provide a detailed listing of actual systems with UL designations and location of each penetrating firestopping product installed.

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of penetrating firestopping products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating penetrating firestoppingcomplies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who specializes in the installation of firestop products and has completed penetrating firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain penetrating firestopping, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide penetrating firestopping that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestopping systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Penetrating firestopping are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:.

a. Penetrating firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Penetrating firestopping correspond to those indicated by reference to penetrating firestopping designations listed by the following:



1) UL in "Fire Resistance Directory."

D. Deliver penetrating firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

E. Store and handle materials for penetrating firestopping to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetrating firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetrating firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetrating firestopping are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetrating firestopping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Firestop Systems Inc.2. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.3. Grace Construction Products4. Isolatek International.5. Nelson Firestop Products.6. RectorSeal Corporation (The).7. Specified Technologies Inc.8. Tremco.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide penetrating firestopping that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating firestopping, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by penetrating firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.



B. Accessories: Provide components for each penetrating firestopping that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by penetrating firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.c. Fire-rated form board.d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.3. Substrate primers.4. Collars.5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide penetrating firestopping containing the types of fill materials by the UL design. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials.

B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.

F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

H. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.



J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

K. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.

2. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetrating firestoppingmanufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetrating firestopping to comply with written recommendations of firestopping system manufacturer and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetrating firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetrating firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by penetrating firestoppingmanufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetrating firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.



3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetrating firestopping to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestopping system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetrating firestopping with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each penetrating firestopping installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words: "Warning--Penetrating Firestopping --Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.3. Penetrating firestopping designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.4. Date of installation.5. Penetrating firestopping manufacturer's name.6. Installer's name.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetrating firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure penetrating firestopping are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetrating firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce penetrating firestopping complying with specified requirements.

3.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE (Attached)


October 15, 2015 122-3130-00

WALL SINGLE W-L-1000 SERIES W-L-2000 SERIES W-L-5000 SERIES W-L-5000 SERIES W-L-6000 SERIES W-L-7000 SERIES CLIV OR NOTE 8

UL CLASSIFIED PENETRANT

SYSTEM MULTIPLE

PENETRANTS

EQUAL TO BARRIER RATING

EQUAL TO F RATING (NOTE 9)

NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NOTE 6 NONE NOTE 7 NONE NONE

10. WHERE WALL THICKNESSES ARE LESS THAN 4 1/2 INCHES THICK, SUBMIT UL SYSTEM TO ACCOMMODATE.

8. WHERE UL CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS ARE NOT AVAILABLE FOR OTHER RECESSED DEVICES, MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF RATED BARRIER CONSTRUCTION AROUND RECESS.

9. WHERE PENETRANT EXITS PENETRATION ENTIRELY WITHIN A ???

THIS SCHEDULE INDICATES WHICH SERIES OF UL CLASSIFIED PENETRATIING FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES ARE ACCEPTABLE FOR THIS PROJECT BASED ON BARRIER TYPE, BARRIER CONSTRUCTION AND PENETRANT TYPE.

EACH SYSTEM WITHIN A GIVEN SERIES IS CLASSIFIED FOR SPECIFIC PENETRATION CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SELECT TPFS ASSEMBLIES THAT ARE CLASSIFIED FOR USE WITH EACH PENETRATION'S CONDITION BASED ON CRITERIA SUCH AS THE FOLLOWING:

PENETRATION SIZE, PENETRATION SHAPE, PENETRANT SIZE(S), PENETRANT MATERIAL(S), PENETRANT QUANTITY, LOCATIONS(S) OF PENETRANT(S) WITHIN PENETRATION.

A. PROVIDE TPFS SYSTEM USING INTUMESCENT ELASTOMERIC WRAP STRIP AS ITS FILL, VOID, OR CAVITY MATERIAL.

B. DO NOT USE SERIES 8000 PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE ONLY SINGLE PENETRATIONS.

7. FOR PENETRATIONS PROTECTED WITH DAMPERS, PROVIDE TPFS SYSTEM APPROVED BY DAMPER MANUFACTURER.

4. SEAL OPENING USING BARRIER'S ORIGINAL CONSTRUCTION.

5. WHERE APPROPRIATE MULTI-PENETRATION CLASSIFICATION IS NOT AVAILABLE; INSTALL PENETRANTS SINGLY, AND PROVIDE SINGLE-PENETRANT SYSTEMS.

6. FOR SYSTEMS THAT OPERATE BELOW 32 DEGF (0DEGC) OR ABOVE 122 DEGF (50 DEGC), COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS:

FIRE HOSE CABINETS

UNIT HEATERS

FIRE FIGHTERS' PHONE

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET

3. EXAMPLES OF OTHER RECESSED DEVICES:

MEDICAL GAS ZONE VALVES

MEDICAL GAS OUTLETS

FIRE VALVE CABINETS

HOT-CHILLDED WATER SUPPLY & RETURN

GLYCOL HEATING HOT WATER SUPPLY & RETURN

DOMESTIC HOT WATER SUPPLY 140 DEGF (60 DEGC)

DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION 140 DEGF (60 DEGC)

STEAM VENT

CONDENSATE PUMP DISCHARGE

BOILER BLOW DOWN

CRYOGENIC VENT

DOMESTIC COLD WATER

DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION LESS THAN 122 DEGF (50 DEGC)

2. EXAMPLES OF SYSTEMS OPERATING BELOW 32 DEGF (0DEGC) OR ABOVE 122 DEGF (50 DEGC):

STEAM SUPPLY & RETURN HEATING HOT WATER SUPPLY & RETURN

1. EXAMPLES OF SYSTEMS THAT OPERATE BETWEEN 32 DEGF (0DEGC) AND 122 DEGF (50 DEGC):

CHILLED WATER SUPPLY & RETURN DOMESTIC HOT WATER LESS THAN 122 DEGF (50 DEGC)

HEAT PUMP WATER SUPPLY & RETURN

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

METALLIC,

UNINSULATED PIPE,

CONDUIT, OR TUBING

(EXAMPLES: COPPER,

IRON, STEEL)

ELECTRICAL

CABLES

CABLE TRAYS

W/ELECTRICAL

CABLES

FIRE STOPPING

REQUIREMENTS

BARRIER

TYPE

BASIS OF CONSTRUCTIO

N

METAL DUCT

PENETRANT TYPE

NO PENETRANTS

INSULATED PIPES

(EXAMPLES:

COPPER, GLASS,

IRON, PLASTIC,

STEEL) IN SYSTEMS

OPERATING

BETWEEN 32 DEGF

(0 DEGC) AND 122

DEGF (50 DEGC)

(NOTE 1)

OTHER

RECESSED

DEVICES (NOTE

3)

MISC ELECTRICAL

PENETRATIONS

(EXAMPLES: BUS

DUCTS)

INSULATED PIPES

(EXAMPLES: COPPER,

GLASS, IRON, PLASTIC,

STEEL) IN SYSTEMS

OPERATING BETWEEN 32

DEGF (0 DEGC) OR ABOVE

122 DEGF (50 DEGC) (NOTE

2)

NONMETALLIC,

UNINSULATED PIPE,

CONDUIT, OR TUBING

(EXAMPLES: PVC, CPVC,

GLASS)

UL LISTED

ELECTRICAL

BOXES

N/A N/A

F RATING

T RATING

METAL

STUDS &

GYPSUM

WALLBOARD

W-L-0000 SERIES

OR NOTE 4 W-L-8000 SERIES NOTE 5

UL DESIGN NO. - U400 SERIES

THIS SCHEDULE USES THE IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS OF UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. AS DEFINED IN THEIR "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" AND AS USED BY MANUFACTURERS ON THEIR UL CLASSIFIED SYSTEM.

INDICATED RATINGS MAY BE EXCEEDED. "N/A" = NOT APPLICABLE

NOTES

N/A

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

W-L-3000

SERIESW-L-4000 SERIES NOTE 8W-L-8000 SERIES

NOTE 5W-L-8000 SERIES NOTE 5

FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

07 84 13-1.


JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.3. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.


A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for the types of Project joints.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L.2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

C. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant:

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.c. Tremco; Tremsil 200

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).3. Class: 25.4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,

O.

D. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant:

1. Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.b. Tremco; Dymeric 511.c. Tremco; Vulkem 922.



2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).3. Class: 50.4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) and T (traffic).5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

E. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant:

1. Products:

a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; POURTHANE.b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200.c. Tremco; Vulkem 245.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable).3. Class: 25.4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic).5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,

O.

2.4 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 1085.

1. Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; BC-158.b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant.c. Tremco; Tremco Butyl Sealant.

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type O P, Grade NF.

B. Products:

1. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.2. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac.3. Tremco; Tremflex 834.

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.



C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant.

a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.



C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.





HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1

SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design.2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.5. Details of each different wall opening condition.6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.7. Details of accessories.8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252.



C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.

D. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.3. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Where permitted, fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel.2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with

thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.



1) Basis of Design: Ceco Assa Abloy; Model Trio-E, R-3.4.2) Locations: Exterior doors and interior doors where indicated.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.

a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches.

4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius.5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or

channels of same material as face sheets.6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 Seamless.

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.



2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 incheswide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-

diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

D. Terminated Stops: Where indicated on interior door frames, terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 90-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame.

2.7 LOUVERS

A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- thick steel frame.

1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- wide steel.



C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.2) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.2) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.3) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in

metal-stud partitions.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.



7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware.3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 26 Sections.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type

of installation indicated.

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.



C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.

Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.



a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between

frames and masonry with grout.5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

6. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact forsecuring to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.



B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 1

SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.



D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Eggers Industries.2. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.4. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.5. VT Industries Inc.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.



B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

C. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:

a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick,

mop, or armor plates.c. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

3. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Custom.2. Faces: MDO.

a. Apply MDO to standard-thickness, closed-grain, hardwood face veneers or directly to high-density hardboard crossbands.

3. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood.4. Core: Particleboard.5. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is

abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.6. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Louvers:

1. Blade Type: Vision-proof, inverted V.2. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, with baked-enamel- or

powder-coated finish.

a. Color: As selected by Architect.

B. Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.



1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish.

a. Color: As selected by Architect.

C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.

1. Color: As selected by Architect.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.6 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09 91 00 "Painting."

B. Color: As selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent

permitted by labeling agency.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.





ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 - 1

SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior aluminum-framed storefronts.

a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.


A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following:

1. Structural loads.2. Thermal movements.3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,

story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.5. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements, to glazing.d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.f. Sealant failure.g. Failure of operating units to function properly.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.



2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

I. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having average U-factor of not more than 0.61 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of systems, made from 12-inchlengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:



1. Joinery.2. Anchorage.3. Expansion provisions.4. Glazing.5. Flashing and drainage.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems.

G. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

D. Accessible Entrances: Comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.c. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.d. Failure of operating components to function properly.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. EFCO.2. Kawneer.3. YKK AP America Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.



2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Framing members are composite assemblies of two separate extruded-aluminum components permanently bonded by an elastomeric material of low thermal conductance.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection.

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.



B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,

and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).

E. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:



1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.2. Do not install damaged components.3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration.6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.

H. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length.

2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive stages as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements.



1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determinecompliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions.

1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch measured to the leading door edge.



DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified, in manufacturer's standard size.

1. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule.

2. Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 2-by-4-inch Samples for sheet and 4-inch long Samples for other products.

C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.

b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.

c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.



d. Fastenings and other installation information.e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door

hardware schedule.f. Mounting locations for door hardware.g. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.

D. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Door Hardware: 2 extra units of each type of door assembly.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

D. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.



1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.


1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.

B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

C. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design".

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high.

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch.

5. Adjust spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 1.5 seconds to move to the closed position.

2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door hardware schedule.

1. Door hardware is scheduled in Part 3.



2.4 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim:

2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.

B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; face finished to match lockset.

1. Core Type:

C. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.7 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock.

1. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders.

a. Provide three cylinder change keys and five master keys.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

2.8 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.28; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks.



2.9 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.

2.10 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E 283 with tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg, as follows:

1. Gasketing on Single Doors: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of door opening.

2.11 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.2. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush

Doors."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.



1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Key Control System:

1. Key Control Cabinet: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

E. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware.

F. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULEHW SET # 1.0

1 Continuous Hinge FM100 628 MR1 Deadlock MS1950 628 AD1 Cylinder AS REQUIRED 626 RU1 TT Cylinder 4066 628 AD1 Status Indicator 4089 130 AD1 Set Door Pulls RM3310-36 x MTG 11XHD US32D RO1 Door Closer DC6210 A11 689 RU1 Threshold 171A PE1 Set Weatherstrip BY DOOR MANUFACTURER 00



HW SET # 2.0

Hinge T4A3386 x NRP US32D MK1 Storeroom Lock ML2057 ASA 626 RU1 Door Closer DC6210 A4 689 RU1 Kick Plate K1050 8" 3BE CSK US32D RO1 Threshold 2005AT PE1 Set Weatherstrip 303AS PE1 Rain Guard 346C PE1 Door Bottom Sweep 3452CNB PE

HW SET # 3.0

Hinge TA2714 US26D MK1 Privacy Set CL3320 AZD 626 RU1 Door Closer DC6210 A4 689 RU1 Kick Plate K1050 8" 3BE CSK US32D RO1 Gasketing S88D PE

MANUFACTURERS ABBREVIATIONS:1. MK - McKinney2. MR - Markar3. AD - Adams Rite4. RU - Corbin Russwin5. RO - Rockwood6. PE - Pemko7. 00 - Other




OPENING LIST

Opening Hdw Set Opening Hdw Set Opening Hdw Set

1-100A 1.0

1-100B 1.0

1-101A 3.0

1-102A 1.0

1-102B 1.0

1-103A 3.0

1-104A 1.0

1-104B 1.0

1-105A 3.0

1-106A 1.0

1-106B 1.0

1-107A 3.0

1-108A 2.0

Shoppes at Hanfield Village - Building 1

October 7, 2015 1


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for doors storefront framing.2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass the following products; 12 inches square.

1. Insulating glass.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 12-inch lengths.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.2. PPG Industries, Inc.3. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.






GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer.2. Obtain reflective-coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00"Quality Requirements," to design glazing.

C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.

2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1

SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.

C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.



D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.



1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-

steel thickness of 0.0312 inch.3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter

wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.

G. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation inadvance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply toframing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.



D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

1. Space studs as follows:

a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.c. Tile backing panels: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.



C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

D. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Building Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.





ACRYLIC VENEER PLASTERING 09 26 13 - 1

SECTION 09 26 13 - ACRYLIC VENEER PLASTERING

PART 1 - GENERAL



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL LATH AND ACCESSORIES

A. Lath: Self furring, expanded diamond mesh copper alloy steel, at 3.4 pounds per square yard,galvanized.

B. Channels: Cold rolled steel 1/2”, 3/4” and 1-1/2” channels.

C. Expansion Joints: No. 15 expansion joints, zinc plated steel with 5/8” grounds.

D. Hanging Wires: Minimum #8 gauge for 1 1/2” channels and #16 gauge for tieing 3/4” channels,all galvanized, annealed steel wire. However, when suspending more than four (4) foot drop,use 3/16” pencil rods for hanging. hangers at maximum 4’0” o.c. for hanging 1 1/2” channels.

2.2 VENT SCREED:

A. Aluminum or zinc plated steel, factory fabricated to lines and radius required, with 7/8” grounds.

2.3 ALUMINUM TRIM:

A. Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard Architectural Class II, Clear Anodic Finish AA-M12C22A31, complying with AAMA 611.

2.4 FINISH COAT

A. One-Component Acrylic Veneer Plaster: Formulated for application directly over substrate without use of separate base-coat material.

B. Basis of Design Product: Sto; Stolit 130 Acrylic Texture Finish.


ACRYLIC VENEER PLASTERING 09 26 13 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

A. One-Component Acrylic Veneer Plaster: Trowel apply coat over substrate to uniform thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch. Fill all voids and imperfections. Allow plaster to set, then scratch and immediately double back with acrylic veneer plaster to uniform total thickness of 3/16 inch.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Protect all finished surfaces from damage and droppings, thoroughly clean all items sodamaged, and leave premises free from dirt and debris caused by the work.

B. Cooperate with work of other trades. Reinforce hangers for light fixture installation.

C. Install expansion joints in sidewalk ceiling at each column line. Install no corner beads onexterior.

D. Where acrylic veneer plaster is applied over concrete masonry, clean surfaces before application.

E. Use grounds and temporary screeds to form clean straight lines with even thickness. Applymetal lath with long dimension across supports, rib lath with projections against supports.

F. Where acrylic veneer plaster abuts other materials, score plaster to V-joint.

3.3 FINISH

A. Apply and cure finish coat to produce a smooth, level, sand finish, in accordance withmanufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Tolerance: Finish within 1/8” tolerance in 10 feet.

C. Cure finished plaster in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.



GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1

SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same

backing indicated for Work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.b. National Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.3. Long Edges: Tapered

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:


2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.3. Long Edges: Tapered

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.3. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:












a. Cornerbead.b. Bullnose bead.c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.e. Expansion (control) joint.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Materials; ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions.

1. Tape: 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready-mix vinyl-based joint compound.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.




3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

C. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

D. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and

decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

F. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.2. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.4. Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels perpendicular to framing unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.



3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Corner bead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.3. Level 5: Where indicated on drawings.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.





ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 1

SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical panel ceiling installation with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items:


A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.

C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following:

1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 5.0 percent of quantity installed.2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0

percent of quantity installed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.

E. Seismic perimeter stabilizer bars, seismic struts, and seismic clips.

F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as indicated on Drawings.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as indicated on Drawings.

B. Metal Suspension System for Acoustical Panels to be shop painted on all sides to match panel color.

1. Color: To match acoustical panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders.



C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs.

2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.





RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 1

SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.2. Resilient molding accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.2. During installation.3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.



C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Armstrong.b. Johnsonite.c. Roppe.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).3. Style: Cove (base with toe).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 6 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.

H. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Finish Schedule.

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Resilient Molding Accessory:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Armstrong.b. Johnsonite.c. Roppe.



B. Description: Nosing for resilient floor covering, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, Joiner for tile and carpet, Transition strips.

C. Material: Rubber.

D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Finish Schedule.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.



4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor that would otherwise be exposed.




A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

E. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.





RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 1

SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl composition floor tile.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

C. Maintenance data.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



1. Floor Tile: Furnish 5 percent additional boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Flooring contractor shall warranty resilient tile flooring installation for 18 months after installation.

B. Manufacturer warranties the material to be free from defect for one full year (12 months) after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. Product as indicated on drawings.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.

1. Class: Class I, monolithic vinyl tile.2. Type: Type A, smooth surface.

C. Thickness: Manufacturer Standard.

D. Size: 12 by 12 inches.

E. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on drawings.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.



B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Identify and grind areas of concern: Loose patch, high spots, expansion joints, contaminants, etc. Grind to remove floor patch, high spots and abnormalities. Grinders shall be “INDUSTRIAL” grade machine with vacuum and HEPA filter system (comparable to HTC-500) with appropriate tooling to address all floor conditions. Provide electrical hook-up for grinding equipment.

a. Cover gondolas, cases, and all other equipment exposed in the area of work with poly prior to grinding/sanding.

b. Should grinding not be required (remove all white patch) sand entire floor with 16 inches (min.) floor buffing machine using 12 grit pads.

c. After grinding and sanding, clean floor and install coat of patch primer and moisture inhibiter.

d. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. Patch floor in 1/8 inch lifts, up to ½ inch. Any floor repairs requiring over ½ inch shall be made using leveling material rather than patch material. Cementuous based products only, no gypsum based products allowed.

e. Acceptable slope not requiring corrective actions shall be ¼ inch maximum over 10 feet.

f. Patch and sand slab using 100 grit pads to ensure smooth substrate for installation of VCT and to eliminate burns and cracked tiles.

2. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.3. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

5. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer and one test point per 2,000 sq. ft., minimum. Any readings above 82% require remediation attention. Written summary shall be provided to Owner’s representative for review and records. If moisture test results are too high contact Owner’s representative to present remedial options and determine associated cost before proceeding. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb. of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.

c. Once acceptable moisture conditions have been achieved, remove existing VCT as identified on plans.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

E. Material Handling:



1. Deliver materials in good condition to the job site in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

2. Store materials on site in flooring contractor’s trailer in a clean, dry, space, off the ground, and protected from weather and from extremes of heat and cold until needed. Protect adhesives from freezing.

3. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

a. Maintain a minimum temperature in the spaces to receive the flooring and accessories of 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) and a maximum temperature of 100 degrees F (38 degrees C) for at least 72 hours before, during, and for not less than 72 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 72 hours before beginning installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) in areas where work is completed. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances.

4. Install resilient flooring and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the flooring. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until they have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with the adhesive.

3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion joint covers, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.



1. Roll floor tiles with 100 lb. roller to complete installation.

H. Complete repairs caused by case leaks, construction, and operational damage up to 200 sq. ft. at no additional cost.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s) directly over floor tile factory finish.

C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.





PAINTS 09 91 00 - 1

SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTS



1.2 GENERAL

A. Factory and shop applied painting: Apply as specified in sections governing the item required.

B. Field Painting:

1. Generally, paint all visible surfaces of all items both interior and exterior, and whereneeded for protection of materials from moisture damage.

2. Apply single coat of primer or wall paint on surfaces subject to accumulation of dust anddirt; that is, door tops and other places where appearance is not critical.

3. Where there is no indication for specific selections, match color and gloss of adjacentfinishes, using coatings of the type recommended by the coating manufacturer in writingand approved by the owner

4. Interior and exterior materials: Concrete

a. Portland cement plasterb. Masonryc. Woodwork (includes back-priming all wood siding, and interiors of millwork).d. Gypsum wallboarde. Steel and other ferrous metals including galvanized steel.

5. Specifically excluded from field painting:

a. Where concealed by ceiling: Structural steel, steel joist girders and joists, metalroof deck, and interior electrical and mechanical work

b. Concrete walks; if remodeling work requires reconditioning of previously paintedwalks notify Architect.

6. Materials and equipment not to be painted.

a. Items of equipment furnished with complete factory finish, except for itemsspecified to be given a finish coat under this Section.

b. Non-ferrous metals, except for items specified and/or indicated to be painted.c. Prefinished sheet metal.d. Finished hardware, excepting hardware that is factory primed. Electrical panels.

7. Surfaces not to be painted shall be left completely free of droppings, overspray and otheraccidentally applied materials resulting from painting work.

C. Paint Materials:

1. Deliver all paint, varnishes, enamels, lacquers, stains and similar materials in the originalcontainers with the seals unbroken and labels intact and with the manufacturer’sinstructions printed thereon.

2. Paint shall arrive on the job color-mixed except for tinting of undercoats and thinning. Allthinning and tinting materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for theparticular material to be thinned or tinted.


PAINTS 09 91 00 - 2

3. All mixed colors shall match the color selection made by the Architect. Verify prior toapplication of the coating.

D. Storage of Materials:

1. Store all materials used on the job in a single place designated by the GeneralSuperintendent or Architect.

2. Keep storage areas clean and free of debris. Take special care to remove all items whichpresent danger of fire daily.

3. Do not store materials in walk-in coolers and freezers.

E. Inspection of Surfaces:

1. Examine surfaces carefully before starting. Note defects which are not reparable byordinary means and notify Architect and General Contractor in writing.Work shall not proceed until such damages are corrected.

2. Commencement of work in a specific area will be construed as acceptance of the substrate.

F. Job Conditions:

1. Before painting is started in any area, broom clean and remove dust.2. Until paint is fully dry, broom cleaning will not be allowed; use commercial vacuum

cleaning equipment.3. Provide adequate illumination for judging colors and finish quality in areas where painting

operations are proceeding.

1.3 Cooperation with other trades: Schedule painting work with other trades. Do not proceed until allaffected work is in place, and, where required, protected from painting operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER:

A. Only Sherwin Williams products will be accepted. If a product is needed which is not producedby Sherwin Williams, notify Publix Architect.

B. SW will be used to designate Sherwin Williams throughout this Section.

C. Publix’s intent is to utilize products that are low in Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC). Wherepossible, product selection has been made to achieve this. Substitution of older type materialswhich contain solvents will not be allowed unless specifically directed by Publix’s Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP, GENERAL:

A. Only skilled mechanics shall be employed. Apply by brush and roller and/or spray. Spraypainting will be back rolled.

B. Protect work in place at all times, and protect all adjacent work and materials by suitable means.

C. In remodeling operations, where electrical panels were previously painted, paint to matchsurrounding wall.


PAINTS 09 91 00 - 3

D. All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination. Evenly spread and smoothly flow onto avoid runs, sags, holidays, brush marks, air bubbles and excessive roller stipple.

E. Provide complete coverage and hide. Where color, stain, or undercoats show through final coatof paint, the surface shall be covered by additional coats until the paint film is of uniform finish,color, appearance and coverage.

F. All coats shall be adequately dry in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations beforeapplying succeeding coats.

G. Wood surfaces to be stained shall appear uniform in shading with color variations caused onlyby the natural wood grain.

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES:

A. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and adequately protected from dampness.

B. Surface shall be free of foreign materials which will adversely affect adhesion or appearance ofapplied coating.

C. Mildew shall be removed and the surface treated in accordance with the coating manufacturersrecommendations.

D. Wood:

1. Sand to smooth and even surface, then dust off.2. Apply pigmented shellac to all knots, pitch and resinous sapwood prior to application of

specified primer coats.3. After priming coat has dried, putty or spackle all nail holes, cracks, open joints and other

defects. Putty shall be colored to match primer, if putty is not compatible with finish, spotprime puttied areas.

E. Drywall: Fill all minor irregularities with spackling paste and sand to a smooth level surface.Exercise care to avoid raising nap of paper.

F. Concrete, Masonry and Stucco

1. Patch large openings and holes and finish flush with adjacent surface. After priming, fillremaining small holes with prepared patching material.

2. Remove form oil from poured-in-place concrete with form oil solvent, or other operationsas required for complete removal.

3. Do not paint until surfaces have cured for 28 days and are dry.

G. Ferrous metal surfaces

1. Remove dirt, dust and surface contaminants. Clean per SSPC-1 and use Simple Greenand water solution, wipe dry with clean cloths.

2. Remove rust, mill scale and defective paint down to sound surfaces or bare metal usingscraper, sandpaper or wire brush as necessary.

3. Touch up all bare metal and damaged shop coats with specified shop coat primer.


PAINTS 09 91 00 - 4

H. Galvanized metal surfaces: Remove dirt and grease with non-hydrocarbon cleaner (e.g. “SimpleGreen” reduced to no more than 30:1 with water, 4 oz. Simple Green to 1 gallon water.) Use a low pressure sprayer to apply cleaning solution, wait a few minutes (not more than 20) beforerinsing, if rinsing is not practical, then wipe with a damp cloth followed by wiping with a clean dry cloth. (If time allows, air dry may be substituted.)

I. Existing surfaces to be repainted (when and where applicable)

1. Where existing work is cut, patched, or added to, all new surfaces shall be painted ortouched up to match existing work as closely as possible.

2. Existing work, where scheduled for repainting or where damaged by work of this Contract,shall be repaired and scraped or sanded to provide good adhesion for paint. Paint tomatch similar new work or existing work as appropriate.

3. Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling (FRP) (Remodels only):

a. Sand with 80-100 grit sandpaper.b. Clean with Formula 409 All-Purpose Cleaner

3.3 WORKMANSHIP FOR EXTERIOR PAINTING

A. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for job conditions and surface preparation.

B. Do not proceed with painting work when the surface temperature is below 50 degrees F (unlesslow temperature paint is being used. See 4.2.1.1)., while the surface is damp, or during rainy orfrosty weather. Avoid painting surfaces while they are exposed to hot sun.

C. Exterior doors shall have tops, bottoms, and side edges finished the same as the exterior facesof these doors.

3.4 WORKMANSHIP FOR INTERIOR PAINTING

A. Enamel or varnish finish applied to wood or metal shall be sanded with fine sandpaper and thencleaned between coats to produce an even surface.

B. Interior doors shall be sealed on the tops and bottoms with the prime coat only. Side edges ofinterior doors shall be finished as faces of these doors.

C. All closet interiors shall be finished the same as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified.

3.5 TESTING:

A. Perform all tests in inconspicuous locations.

B. Submit all test results to Publix representative and Sherwin Williams representative.

C. Adhesion Testing:

1. If testing waterborne acrylics, building must be conditioned prior to performing the test.2. Perform ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.

a. Test Method A should be used.b. Results should be 3A or better.


PAINTS 09 91 00 - 5

D. Mil testing:

1. Drywall and block walls: Use wet film thickness guage.2. Any other substrates: Dry film thickness gauge.

E. Caulking

1. Caulk between exposed masonry and steel frames. Caulk as required to close all mortarjoints.

2. Joints and spaces to be caulked shall be clean and dry. Leave surfaces neat and clean.Caulk before final painting.

F. Clean-Up:

1. Upon completion of the work, remove all paint and varnish spots from floors, glass andother surfaces.

2. Remove from the premises all rubbish and accumulated debris.3. Leave work in clean, orderly and acceptable condition.

3.6 SCHEDULES

A. Pre-painting Conference

1. Five business days prior to start of ceiling painting meet at project site with Representative from General Contractor, Painting Contractor, SW and Publix Supermarkets.

2. Review requirements (contract documents), submittals, status of coordinating work,availability of materials, proposed schedule, requirements for inspections, proposedapplication procedures, surface preparation, record discussion, including agreement ordisagreement on matters of significance.

3. Furnish minutes of meeting to each participant.

3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Ferrous Metal (not aluminum or shop painted):

1. 1st Coat - Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer B66-3105-10 mils wet, 2-4 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW DTM Semi-gloss - Waterborne - B66-200 Series. 6.5 mils wet,2.5 mils dry per coat.

3. Color as indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by Publix Architect.

B. Exterior Doors and Jambs

1. 1st Coat - Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer B66-3105-10 mils wet, 2-4 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW DTM Semi-gloss - Waterborne - B66-200 Series.6.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry per coat

3. Outside color as selected by Shopping Center Architect and approved by Publix'Architect; inside color as specified in interior paint paragraphs.

August 10, 2015 Shoppes at Hanfield Village 122-2943-00 Publix Supermarkets Inc. - Canopy Set

PAINTS 09 91 00 - 6

3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Masonry (Back Rooms and Stair Wells)

1. 1st Coat - SW Loxon Block Surfacer - Waterborne - A24W200.16 mils wet, 8 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW ProMar 400 Semi-Gloss - Waterborne - B31- W4400 Series.4mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat

B. Concrete Masonry (Sales Area)

1. 1st Coat - SW Loxon Block Surfacer - Waterborne - A24W200.16 mils wet, 8 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW ProMar 400 Flat - Waterborne - B30-W4400 Series4 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry per coat

3. (Provide Semi-gloss finish from finished floor to 8’ A.F.F. at all walls facing the salesarea.).

C. Concrete Masonry with Epoxy where indicated

1. 1st Coat - Loxon Block Surfacer - Waterborne - A24W200.16 mils wet, 8 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW Water Based Tile-Clad - 2 part Water Based3. Part A # B73-100, Part B # B73- V100

D. Gypsum Wallboard (Sales Area):

1. 1st Coat - SW PrepRite 200 Primer B28W2004 mils wet, 1.1 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW ProMar 400 Latex Flat - Waterborne - B30- W4400 Series.4mils wet, 1.2 mils dry per coat

3. (Provide Semi-gloss finish from finished floor to 8’ A.F.F. at all walls facing the salesarea.).

E. Gypsum Wallboard in Back-rooms:

1. 1st Coat - SW PrepRite 200 Latex Primer B28W200 / Sealer B51W20.4 mils wet, 1.1 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: SW ProMar 400 Semi-Gloss - Waterborne - B31- W400 Series.4 milswet, 1.3 mils dry per coat

F. Customer Service, Front Offices, Cash Room, General Office and Manager’s Offices, RestroomCeilings (where indicated as painted):

1. 1st Coat - SW PrepRite 200 Latex Primer B28W200.4 mils wet, 1.1 mils dry.

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW ProMar 400 Latex Semi-Gloss - Waterborne - B31-W400 Series.4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat

G. Gypsum Wallboard behind Refrigerated Cases

1. One Coat - SW PrepRite 200 Primer B28W2004 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry

H. Plywood, Wood Shelving, Wood Base (Wainscot in back rooms):


PAINTS 09 91 00 - 7

1. 1st Coat - A100 Latex Wood Primer / Sealer B42W41.4 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW ProMar 400 Semi-Gloss - Waterborne - B31- W4400 Series.4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat

I. FRP (remodels only)

1. 1st Coat - ICI Gripper Primer4 mils wet, 2 mils dry

2. 2nd & 3rd Coats - SW Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy - B70W2116.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry per coat

J. Plenum Areas (In Bakery, around hoods, oven & supply or exhaust curtain walls where otherfinish is not indicated.)

1. 1st Coat - SW PrepRite 200 Latex Primer B28W2004 mils wet, 1.1 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW ProMar 400 Latex Semi-Gloss - Waterborne - B31-W4400Series.4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat

3.9 INTERIOR EXPOSED METAL (BRUSH APPLICATION - ALL METALS EXCEPT AS ALLOWEDIN SPRAY APPLICATIONS LISTED BELOW.):

1. 1st Coat - Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer - Solvent based - B50WZ1.6.0-8.0 mils wet, 3.0-4.0 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW Superpaint Interior Latex Semi-Gloss - A88 series4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat

3. Color: To match adjacent wall.

3.10 INTERIOR EXPOSED METAL:

A. Structural steel and primed metal deck; electrical work; fittings, and other work; fire sprinklerpiping; plumbing and gas piping; hangers, and other supports; other exposed items which arenot factory finished):

1. Spot Prime (all unprimed ferrous metal, field welds and rusted areas) - SW Kem KromikUniversal Primer B50WZ16.0-8.0 mils wet, 3.0-4.0 mils dry

2. 1st and 2nd Coats - SW Super Save-Lite Dryfall Semi-gloss B47W626.0 mils wet, 3.0 mils dry per coat

3.11 HYBRID PROTOTYPES ONLY:Spot Prime (Use as needed) - SW Kem Kromik Univeral Metal Primer B50WZ16.0-8.0 mils wet, 3.0-4.0 mils dry

1. 1st Coat - SW Super Save-Lite Dry Fall Flat B48W61 (Not tinted - spray as-is primercolor)6.0-6.5 mils wet, 3.0-3.5 mils dry)

2. 2nd Coat - SW Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall Flat B42T1 (Tinted toSW 6102 Portobello)7.0-11.0 mils wet, 3.0-4.5 mils dry


PAINTS 09 91 00 - 8

3.12 INTERIOR GALVANIZED METAL:

A. Ductwork, adjacent hangers and supports, refrigeration pans and misc. galvanized metal. (Sprayapplication allowed over 13 ft. AFF only: Protect galvanized surfaces from alkyd coatings. Seeprevious section for method of cleaning galvanized surfaces.):

1. 1st Coat - SW DTM Acrylic Primer Finish B66W15-10 mils wet, 2.5- 5 mils dry

2. 2nd and 3rd Coats- SW ProMar 400 Latex Semi-Gloss - Waterborne - B31-W4400 Series4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat

3. See drawings for color selection.

B. Refrigeration Pipe Insulation

1. 1st Coat - SW DTM Semi-gloss - Waterborne - B66-200 Series.6.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry

2. 2nd Coat - SW DTM Semi-gloss - Waterborne - B66-200 Series.6.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry

C. Glycol Refrigeration Piping (light colored final coat)

1. 1st Coat - KIM 400C NT - Tint to P16.5 mils wet, 1 mils dry

2. 2nd Coat - SW DTM Semi-gloss - Waterborne - B66-200 Series.6.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry

D. Glycol Refrigeration Piping (dark colored final coat)

1. 1st Coat - KIM 400C NT - Tint to P36.5 mils wet, 1 mils dry

2. 2nd Coat - SW DTM Semi-gloss - Waterborne - B66-200 Series.

E. Fillers

1. Paintable caulking - SW C-950 Acrylic. 2. Spackling compound - SW C-50.3. All caulking and spackling shall be done after prime coat is applied.

F. Putty

1. DAP "33" Glazing Compound2. 6.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry



SIGNAGE 10 14 00 - 1

SECTION 10 14 00 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Panel signs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

2.2 PANEL SIGNS

A. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

1. Acrylic Sheet: 0.060 inch thick.2. Edge Condition: Beveled.


SIGNAGE 10 14 00 - 2

3. Corner Condition: Square.4. Mounting: Unframed.

a. Wall mounted with concealed anchors.

5. Color: As indicated.6. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with

contrasting colors.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.

2. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.

2.5 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES

A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.


SIGNAGE 10 14 00 - 3

1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.

2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces.3. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through

predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.



SIGNAGE 10 14 00 - 4


TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1

SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Handrails2. Mirrors3. Under-lavatory guards.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices as required to prevent delaying the Work.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.

B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.


A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

B. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Grab Bar:


a. American Specialties, Inc.b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. Provide nonslip grasping surface finis

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Mirror Unit:


a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Bobrick B-165-2436b. Size 24 x 36 inch.c. Frame: No 4 finish. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.d. Backing: Full mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch galvanized steel sheet with non-

absorptive filler material.

D. Under- Lavatory Guards.

1. Manufacturers: Plumberex www.plumberex.com prefabricated trap and piping insulationkit, Handy Shield MAXX series.

2. Color white, Provide heavy duty security snaps and all required accessory fittings.

3. Provide at all lavatory and sink trap and supply fittings, including cold water supply.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.






http://www.plumberex.com/



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.





TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16 - 1

SECTION 31 31 16 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Soil treatment with termiticide.2. Wood treatment with borate.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label.

B. Product certificates.

C. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following:

1. Date and time of application.2. Moisture content of soil before application.3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.6. Areas of application.7. Water source for application.

D. Wood Treatment Application Report: Include the following:

1. Date and time of application.2. Brand name and manufacturer of borate.3. Quantity of undiluted borate used.4. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.5. Areas of application.


A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located..

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered Label.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.



1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' continuing service including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of termite activity. Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period; and terms for future renewal options.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Termiticides:

a. Aventis Environmental Science USA LP; Termidor.b. Bayer Corporation; Premise 75.c. Dow AgroSciences LLC; Dursban TC.d. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Talstar.e. Syngenta; Demon TC.

2. Borates:

a. Nisus Corp.; Bora-Care, Jecta.b. NovaGuard Technologies, Inc.; Armor-Guard, Shell-Guard.c. U.S. Borax Inc.; Tim-Bor.

2.2 SOIL TREATMENT

A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.

2.3 WOOD TREATMENT

A. Borate: Provide an EPA-registered borate complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution for spray application and a gel solution for pressure injection, formulated to prevent termite infestation in wood. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum diffusible borate concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.

3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.

1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.

2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.

3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground.

4. Masonry: Treat voids.5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be

penetrated.

B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

D. Post warning signs in areas of application.

E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.

3.3 APPLYING BORATE TREATMENT

A. Application: Mix wood treatment borate solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of borate, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, so that wood framing, sheathing, siding, and structural members subject to infestation receive treatment.



1. Framing and Sheathing: Apply borate solution by spray to bare wood for complete coverage.

2. Wood Members Thicker Than 4 Inches: Inject borate gel solution under pressure into holes of size and spacing required by manufacturer for treatment.

3. Exterior Uncoated Wood Trim and Siding: Apply borate solution to bare wood siding. After 48 hours, apply a seal coat of paint as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.



DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19 - 1

SECTION 32 31 19 - DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Swing gates.2. Gate operators, including controls.





B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.

1. Provide Samples 12 inches in length for linear materials.2. Provide Samples 12 inches square for bar grating and sheet or plate materials.


A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Product Test Reports: For decorative metallic-coated-steel tubular picket fences, including finish, indicating compliance with referenced standard and other specified requirements.


A. Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Lightning-Protection System: Maximum grounding-resistance value of 25 ohms under normal dry conditions.

2.2 SWING GATES

A. Gate Configuration: Double leaf, steel post, aluminum panel as indicated on drawings.

B. Gate Frame Height: As indicated.

C. Gate Opening Width: As indicated.

D. Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members as indicated.

E. Aluminum Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square tubing.

1. Frame Members: Extruded-aluminum tubes 6 by 2 inches with 0.140-inch wall thickness.2. Bracing Members: Extruded-aluminum tubes 2 by 2 inches with 0.140-inch wall

thickness.

F. Frame Corner Construction: Welded or assembled with corner fittings and 5/16-inch-diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet wide or wider.

G. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for pairs of gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate.

H. Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: 39 - Full surface, triple weight, antifriction bearing.2. Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel, or malleable iron; galvanized.

I. Rim Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: As required by Owner.2. Material: Cast, forged, or extruded brass or bronze.3. Mounting Plate: Configuration necessary for mounting locks. Fabricate from 1/8-inch-

thick, steel plate; galvanized.

J. Cane Bolts: Provide for inactive leaf of pairs of gates. Fabricated from 1/2-inch-diameter, round steel bars, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Finish to match gates. Provide galvanized-steel pipe strikes to receive cane bolts in both open and closed positions.

K. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #4 - good-quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter.

L. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.



M. Steel Finish: As indicated.

N. Aluminum Finish: As indicated.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Bar Grating: NAAMM MBG 531.

1. Bars: Hot-rolled steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel, Type B.2. Wire Rods: ASTM A 510.

C. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Grade 45 or cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel, Grade 50.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 50, with G90 coating.

E. Aluminum-Zinc, Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality, Grade 50, with AZ60 coating.

2.4 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloys and tempers with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated in paragraphs below for each aluminum form required.

B. Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

C. Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.

D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.

E. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, Alloy 6061-T6.

F. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.

2.5 COATING MATERIALS

A. Shop Primer for Steel: Manufacturer's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Epoxy Primer for Galvanized Steel: Epoxy primer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

C. Polyurethane Intermediate Coat and Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.




A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, 3-inch slump, and 1-inch maximum aggregate size or dry, packaged, normal-weight concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387/C 387M mixed with potable water according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.

2.7 GROUNDING MATERIALS

A. Grounding Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger.

1. Material above Finished Grade: Copper.2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper.3. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper

wire, terminated with copper ferrules.

B. Grounding Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.

1. Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic-welded type.2. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel.

a. Size: 5/8 by 96 inches.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning."

1. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic coating to be applied over it.

B. Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning, apply two-coat finish consisting of epoxy primer and TGIC polyester topcoat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of not less than 8 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

1. Construction layout and field engineering are specified in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

3.3 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means.Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

3.4 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gate operators according to manufacturer's written instructions, aligned and true to fence line and grade.

B. Excavation for Support Posts Pedestals Concrete Bases: Hand-excavate holes for bases in firm, undisturbed soil to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by gate operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated.

C. Concrete Bases: Cast-in-place or precast concrete, depth not less than 12 inches, dimensioned and reinforced according to gate operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on Drawings.



3.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet except as follows:

1. Fences within 100 Feet of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at maximum intervals of 750 feet.

a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening.

1) Bond metal gates to gate posts.2) Bond across openings, with and without gates, except at openings indicated

as intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 18 inches below finished grade.

B. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing.

C. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at grounding location.

D. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame.

E. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical

clamps.4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and

mechanical clamps.5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

F. Bonding to Lightning-Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning-protected building or structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning-protection down conductor or lightning-protection grounding conductor, complying with NFPA 780.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Grounding-Resistance Tests: Subject completed grounding system to a megger test at each grounding location. Measure grounding resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation, without soil having been moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural grounding resistance. Perform tests by two-point method according to IEEE 81.

2. Excessive Grounding Resistance: If resistance to grounding exceeds specified value, notify Architect promptly. Include recommendations for reducing grounding resistance and a proposal to accomplish recommended work.



3. Report: Prepare test reports of grounding resistance at each test location certified by a testing agency. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Lubricate hardware, gate operators, and other moving parts.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates.


